Quarterlytics / TheWorks.co.uk

TheWorks.co.uk

wrks · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker wrks
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2024 Annual Report · TheWorks.co.uk
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
 
 
 
Annual Report and 
Accounts 2024
Time Well Spent
Supporting families with affordable, 
feel-good ways to spend their time.

Our purpose:
To inspire Reading, Learning, 
Creativity and Play
Contents
Strategic report
Highlights	
01
Our strategic roadmap	
02
Our investment case	
03
Our proposition at a glance 	
04
Chair’s statement	
06
Chief Executive’s review	
07
Our market review	
10
Our business model	
12
Our strategy and progress	
14
How we measure performance	
16
Financial review	
17
Our stakeholders 	
22
Section 172 statement	
24
ESG statement 	
25
Non-financial and sustainability 
information statement	
30
Risk management and 
principal risks and uncertainties	
38
Corporate governance
Board of Directors	
 44
Corporate governance statement	
46
Audit Committee report	
52
Nomination Committee report	
55
Directors’ remuneration report	
57
Annual report on remuneration	
59
Directors’ report	
67
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities	 70
Financial statements
Independent auditor’s report	
71
Consolidated income statement	
79
Consolidated statement  
of comprehensive income	
80
Consolidated statement  
of financial position	
81
Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity	
82
Consolidated cash flow statement	
83
Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements	
84
Company statement  
of financial position	
115 
Company statement  
of changes in equity	
116 
Notes to the Company  
financial statements	
117
Advisers and contacts 	
IBC

Highlights
Operational highlights
•	 A persistently challenging consumer environment, tough Christmas 
trading and increased cost headwinds put pressure on profitability. 
As a result, decisive action was taken to grow product margins, 
reset the cost base and scale back non-essential investments, 
with the aim of improving profitability. This included relocating 
our online fulfilment centre and changing ways of working in our 
retail Distribution Centre, negotiating more favourable terms with 
suppliers and landlords, transferring from the Main Market to AIM 
and ending our customer loyalty scheme to focus instead 
on providing customers with everyday low prices.
•	 Evolved our brand to fulfil our purpose – to inspire reading, 
learning, creativity and play – commencing a project to make 
our brand positioning clearer. This is now being rolled out in our 
external marketing and includes the introduction of our new 
#TimeWellSpent strapline.
•	 Refined our product proposition to more clearly align to our 
brand purpose through the introduction of new toys and games 
ranges and the relaunch of our kids’ book range in spring 2024.
•	 Improved the quality of our overall store portfolio through 
9 openings, 24 closures (of mostly loss-making or low-profit stores), 
5 relocations and 21 refits. Operated from 511 stores at the end of 
FY24, of which 96% are profitable. New stores on track to deliver 
strong payback of approximately one year.
•	 Leadership changes at both plc Board and Operating Board 
level, including streamlining the Operating Board so that it is 
more agile and better positioned to deliver on strategy and 
growth plans.
•	 Placed 15th in the Best Big Companies to Work For in national 
list and 10th in Retail Week’s top 50 happiest retailers to work 
for, demonstrating strong colleague engagement.
Visit our retail website
theworks.co.uk
Visit our corporate website
corporate.theworks.co.uk
Financial highlights
1	 LFL sales growth has been calculated with reference to the FY23 
comparative sales figures based on a 53-week period. 
2	 See Note 15 to the financial statements for information relating 
to the prior period adjustment. 
3	 Final dividend for the period ended 1 May 2022 paid in FY23.
Revenue
£282.6m
£280.1m
FY23
FY24
£282.6m
Profit before tax2
£6.9m
Restated – £9.0m
FY23
FY24
£6.9m
Basic EPS2
10.2p
Restated – 15.0p
FY23
FY24
10.2p
Adjusted PBT2
£3.2m
Restated – £5.3m
FY23
FY24
£3.2m
Non-IFRS 16 
Adjusted EBITDA2
£6.0m
Restated – £9.0m
FY23
FY24
£6.0m
Like-for-like (LFL) 
sales variance1
(0.9%)
(0.9%)
+4.2%
FY23
FY24
2.4p3
Dividend
0.0p
FY23
FY24 0.0p
Adjusted basic EPS2
4.2p
Restated – 9.2p
FY23
FY24
4.2p
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
01
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Our strategic roadmap
Our better, not just bigger strategy
Our strategic enablers
Creating a better 
business
Our purpose and strategy aim to bring our brand to life and make 
The Works ‘better, not just bigger’. 
Develop our brand 
and increase 
customer 
engagement
Enhance our 
online proposition
Optimise our 
store estate
Underpinned by our values
Our colleagues
Our systems and data
Our ESG commitments
Our purpose 
To inspire reading, learning, creativity 
and play – making lives more fulfilled.
Our mission
Supporting families with affordable, 
feel‑good ways to spend their time.
Drive operational 
improvements
 Read more about our strategy on pages 14 and 15
 Read more about our ESG approach on pages 25 to 29
 Read more about our culture on page 26
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
02

Our investment case
A differentiated offering 
in the value retail 
sector with significant 
growth potential
Broad demographic appeal, in 
significant addressable markets
Multiple levers for sales growth
Improving operating margins
Our purpose – to inspire reading, 
learning, creativity and play – has 
significant relevance, particularly 
in a digital age when customers are 
looking for off-screen ways to connect.
Store estate of over 500 stores in a wide 
range of locations across the UK and 
Ireland. Supported by an online presence 
that increases customer convenience 
and accessibility of our proposition.
Significant opportunity to drive 
sales growth through both stores 
and online sales channels, with 
initiatives including: growing brand 
awareness through bringing our 
evolved brand to life; increasing sales 
densities in stores by better tailoring 
space allocation in stores to meet local 
needs; better supporting families with 
their key everyday shopping missions to 
ensure they are connecting and having 
Time Well Spent; and better executing 
our plans in our sales channels through 
a more optimised operating model.
Diverse customer base across four 
addressable markets creates significant 
growth opportunity. Current market 
share is c.2%, providing significant 
headroom to grow. 
Opportunity to drive cost efficiencies 
and product margin improvement which, 
combined with sales growth, will help 
deliver our medium-term ambition to 
return to pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA margins 
of 5%.
Uniquely positioned in the market 
providing better value than specialist 
retailers and better choice and 
customer service than discounters.
Clear and relevant purpose
Unique market position
Accessible and convenient 
multi-channel proposition
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
03
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

A leading family 
friendly value retailer 
Store estate
Multi-channel
Colleagues
•	 Diverse locations including high 
streets, shopping centres, retail parks, 
factory outlets and garden centres.
•	 Serve local communities and play 
a key role supporting local 
fundraising activities.
•	 9 new store openings during FY24, 
24 closures of mostly loss-making or 
low-profit stores, 5 relocations and 
21 refits improved the quality of the 
store estate. 
511
stores in the UK and Ireland
•	 Fully transactional online store.
•	 Exclusive online product offerings.
•	 Convenient click & collect service.
41.2 million 
website visits during FY24
•	 Loyal, dedicated and highly 
engaged colleagues are key 
to our success. 
•	 Recognised as a very good 
company to work for by Best 
Companies in recognition of high 
levels of employee engagement.
•	 Ranked 15th Best Big Company 
to Work For in national list. 
Consistently ranked in the top 25 
for the past six years.
c.4,000
colleagues
Our proposition at a glance
Our brand purpose
Our proposition
Purpose
To inspire Reading, 
Learning, Creativity 
and Play
Problem
In a world full of screens, 
people want to find 
other ways to connect 
and spend their time
Mission
Supporting families with 
affordable, feel‑good 
ways to spend their time
Positioning
Connecting people with 
screen-free things to do
Our strapline
Time Well Spent
Specialist 
categories
Books; Toys & Games; 
Art & Craft; Stationery
Convenient 
channels
511 stores (UK & Ireland) 
theworks.co.uk
Famous for
Great Value
Fantastic Range
Screen-Free Activities
Hero deals
10 for £10 Kids Books
3 for £6 Adult Books
2 for £12/3 for £15 Gifting
Own brands
11 own-brand, unique 
products and value
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
04

Own brand
Own brand is 52% of our sales and we are super proud of that. The creative and buying teams work 
closely together to continue to strengthen our own brands to ensure that they are successful within 
the marketplace and offer great quality and incredible value for money.
Arts & Crafts
Kids’ appeal
Adults’ appeal
Books that they want to read 
(not be made to read). Fun 
learning, reading development 
and activity.
Credible offer of front list titles 
and key authors that we are known 
for, inspiring reading enjoyment.
Books
Stationery
Toys & Games
Crawford & Black 
•	 Ages: Adult 
•	 Comprehensive range of art essentials at great value 
•	 Easily accessible to all on a budget
Works Essentials 
•	 Ages: Adult 
•	 Complete range of stationery essentials 
at great value 
•	 Easily accessible to all on a budget
Make & Create 
•	 Ages: Teen – Adult 
•	 Igniting the creative spark in crafty people 
who like to be unique and personalise 
•	 Seasonal sub-brands for key customer 
moments: Christmas and Halloween
Paper Place 
•	 Ages: Adult 
•	 Trade up stationery 
•	 Offering incredible quality and ergonomic design
Make & Create – Easter 
•	 Ages: 2 – 12 years
•	 Igniting the creative spark in crafty kids 
who like to be unique and personalise
Scribblicious 
•	 Ages: Teen – Adult
•	 Co-ordinated collections of fashion stationery
PlayWorks 
•	 Ages: 0 – 7 years
•	 Inspiring learning and creativity through play
•	 Covering pre-school, role-play, educational 
and boys’/girls’ toys and puzzles
Seasonal & Events
Winterworks 
•	 Ages: Kids – Adult 
•	 Seasonally relevant ranges of items to enhance 
Christmas celebrations
Hip Hip Yay 
•	 Ages: Kids – Adult
•	 Party celebration essentials
•	 Covering balloons, cards, wrap and decorations
Make & Create for Kids 
•	 Ages: 2 – 12 years
•	 Inspiring learning through 
creativity and art
Jotz
•	 Ages: 2 – 12 years 
•	 Co-ordinated collections of kids’ stationery 
Corner Piece Puzzles 
•	 Ages: 9 months – 99 years 
•	 Improving cognitive skills with 
exclusive designs
Kids’ appeal
Adults’ appeal
Pocket money spends and 
hot playground trends. Social 
development, gift giving and 
second presents. 
Family fun, play, entertainment 
and novelty gifting.
Kids’ appeal
Adults’ appeal
Activities to interact, entertain 
and engage. Kits and party 
bundles to create and play. 
Family activities, new adoptees 
and the entry level hobbyist.
Kids’ appeal
Adults’ appeal
Innovative, fun, co-ordinated 
collections. Party essentials, 
gift giving and back to school. 
Core essentials for the office 
and school and collections to 
inspire and complement.
Product proposition
All seasonal events optimise our purpose and support the one-stop-
shop experience. Seasonal fun, games, craft and reading. Activities 
to keep the kids busy and get families doing.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
05
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Chair’s statement
Introduction
I am delighted to have joined The Works as Chair in July 2024 and, 
on behalf of the whole Board, would like to take this opportunity 
to thank my predecessor, Carolyn Bradley, for her contribution to 
the business. 
My initial, overriding impression since joining The Works is that 
this is a business with a clear purpose, a strong value proposition, 
a quality store portfolio, a positive and healthy culture, a tight-knit 
leadership team and passionate colleagues. 
While much important progress has been made in recent 
years, this has not yet translated into an improved financial 
performance. There remains much to be done and although 
the business continues to face challenges, this also presents an 
exciting opportunity to evolve and grow. I believe there is huge 
potential for increased shareholder value and I look forward to 
working closely with Gavin and his leadership team to realise this. 
FY24 performance 
The business faced difficult economic conditions in FY24, which 
put pressure on sales and impacted profitability. Action taken to 
reduce the cost base and grow product margins, as well as improve 
sales in the final quarter provides a stronger foundation from which to 
build. Credit must go to Gavin and his leadership team for ensuring 
The Works ended the year in line with market expectations and 
positioning the business for growth in the years ahead. 
Strategy 
Following several years of major externally driven operational 
challenges, resulting in financial underperformance and a reshaping 
and strengthening of both the Operating Board and the plc Board, 
as detailed below, now is the opportune moment to put in place 
a clear plan to transform the business. Strong, affirmative action 
is needed to drive sales growth, improve operating margins and 
deliver strong shareholder returns. A review of our longer-term 
goals, the strategy and operational plans to deliver on those goals 
is currently underway and we expect to be in a position to share 
more on this alongside our interim results in January 2025. 
Our Board and leadership 
The business has undergone leadership changes at both 
an Operating and plc Board level over the last year. 
Lynne Tooms was appointed as Commercial Director in 
September 2023 and Rosie Fordham stepped up to the role of CFO in 
January 2024. Both have had a hugely positive impact on the business. 
To reflect where The Works is today and to ensure that the 
business is best able to deliver on its strategy, Gavin restructured 
his leadership team in April 2024. We now have a streamlined 
Operating Board which has accelerated the delivery of our 
plans and improved cross-functional working. 
We have also seen changes at a plc Board level during the year. 
In addition to my appointment in July 2024, John Goold and Mark 
Kirkland, both from one of our shareholders Kelso plc, joined as 
Non-Executive Directors in February 2024. They decided to step 
down from the Board in October 2024. 
Catherine Glickman, Independent Non-Executive Director, 
announced her intention not to seek re-election at the AGM. 
The process to appoint Catherine’s successor, someone that has 
extensive value retail experience, is expected to be completed 
before the end of the calendar year. 
Capital distributions 
The Board is not proposing a final dividend for FY24. We will 
continue to keep future shareholder distributions under consideration 
as profitability improves and net cash allows whilst noting some of 
our major shareholders’ preference for share buybacks over the 
payment of dividends. A further update will be made alongside 
our interim results in January 2025.
Outlook
The Board is mindful that the consumer environment has not 
yet fully recovered and of continued cost headwinds. With a 
strengthened leadership team and Board, a good foundation for 
strategic progress, action taken around costs, and a solid start 
to sales in the new financial year, we are, however, confident that 
The Works will deliver profit growth in FY25. 
Finally, I would like to thank our shareholders for their continued 
support whilst the business is undergoing a period of transition. 
Steve Bellamy 
Chair 
1 October 2024
This is a business with a clear purpose 
and strong value proposition
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
06

Chief Executive’s review
Introduction
In FY24 we made good progress against our ‘better, not just bigger’ 
strategy, whilst also shifting our focus in response to challenging 
trading conditions. Following a challenging second half of 2023, with 
particularly tough Christmas trading, stabilising profitability became 
our primary focus. Decisive action was taken to grow gross margins, 
reset the cost base and scale back non-essential investments. I am 
pleased to report that, as a result of this action, we finished the year in 
line with market expectations. We are well positioned to realise further 
benefits and deliver increased shareholder value in FY25 and beyond. 
Trading performance and financial results 
In FY24 we delivered total revenue growth of 0.9% to £282.6m and 
a total like-for-like (LFL) sales decline of 0.9%, which was lower than 
our expectations at the start of the year. Across the year our stores, 
which comprise c.90% of sales, saw sales increase by 0.6% on a LFL 
basis, whilst online LFL sales declined by 12.4%. Outlined below are 
the main factors that contributed to this performance:
•	 The backdrop to FY24 was persistently challenging, characterised 
by high consumer inflation, low consumer confidence and ongoing 
cost-of-living pressures. This impacted Christmas trading in 
particular and drove high levels of promotional activity across the 
market ahead of our peak Christmas season. 
•	 We faced capacity issues at our Distribution Centre in the run 
up to peak trading, exacerbated by operational challenges with 
embedding a new picking process, which temporarily disrupted 
the flow of stock during our key trading period. 
•	 We had a promising start to the year and good strategic 
progress was made, particularly through improvements to our 
product proposition. New toys and games ranges performed well 
in H1 and the relaunch of our kids’ book, core art and stationery 
ranges drove improved trading in store post-Christmas. 
We finished the year in line with market 
expectations as a result of decisive 
action taken
•	 As part of our ongoing focus on improving the quality of our store 
portfolio we closed a net 15 stores, resulting in a sales headwind. 
As the closed stores were mostly loss-making or low-profit stores, 
the profit impact was broadly neutral.
•	 We implemented a series of changes to our online channel to 
improve profitability. Although this temporarily impacted sales, it 
meant that our online channel broke even in FY24 and the Board 
expects this channel to be profitable in FY25. 
Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA for FY24 was £6.0m (FY23: £9.0m), 
which was lower than our expectations at the start of the year. 
We faced increased cost headwinds in FY24, both those that we 
had anticipated (e.g. higher business rates, increases to the National 
Living and Minimum Wages and investment in our merchandising 
team) and those we could not have foreseen (e.g. substantial 
increases in freight costs due to supply chain disruption). Faced 
with constrained profitability and uncertainty regarding a recovery in 
consumer confidence, in the second half of the year we implemented 
a programme to stabilise profitability. Action taken included: 
•	 Transferring The Works from its Main Market listing to AIM which 
will result in lower corporate costs and has a more flexible 
regulatory environment. 
•	 Moving our online fulfilment centre, operated by third-party provider 
iForce, to a more efficient facility in early January, which is expected 
to deliver a c.£1.0m per year reduction in operating costs.
•	 Ending our Together Rewards loyalty scheme to focus instead 
on maintaining everyday affordable prices. The scheme had 
c.2 million active members and although loyalty members 
typically spent more, it did not deliver adequate returns on 
the annual investment of over £2.0m. 
•	 Improving product margins through negotiations with suppliers 
and more targeted promotional activity.
•	 Introducing changes to ways of working in our Distribution 
Centre and store labour models, which are expected to drive 
significant efficiencies.
•	 Negotiating rent savings with landlords, particularly for low-profit 
and loss-making stores with leases up for renewal.
•	 Restructuring our Operating Board to give us a more agile, 
streamlined and focused leadership team.
We expect to realise most of the benefits from this activity in 
FY25, however were encouraged to see improved margins and 
lower costs coming through towards the end of FY24. This action, 
coupled with improving store sales in the final quarter, meant that 
we finished the year in line with expectations, delivering pre-IFRS 16 
Adjusted EBITDA of £6.0m (FY23: £9.0m) and Adjusted profit before 
tax of £3.2m (restated FY23: £5.3m).
Overall, whilst it is disappointing that our performance in the year 
was lower than anticipated at the outset, I am pleased that the 
decisive action taken in the second half has started to deliver 
positive results. This, combined with the good strategic progress 
outlined below, means we are confident that The Works now has 
a solid foundation on which to return to growth in FY25 and beyond. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
07
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Chief Executive’s review continued
Strategy 
Despite the challenges faced, our teams rallied together and 
delivered good progress against our ‘better, not just bigger’ 
strategy in FY24. Whilst we believe that this continues to be the 
right high-level strategic direction for the business, we feel that 
now is the right time to evolve the strategy and set out a clear plan 
to transform the business, with the ambition to drive sales growth, 
improve operating margins and deliver strong shareholder returns. 
A review of the strategy is currently underway and we expect 
to update shareholders on our goals and priority focus areas 
in early 2025.
Strategic progress in FY24 includes: 
Developing our brand and increasing our customer engagement
•	 Recruited a new Commercial Director to lead our product, 
sourcing and quality strategy, and to ensure our brand and 
product proposition continues to evolve and is aligned with 
our purpose, with good progress made. 
•	 Continued to evolve our brand to fulfil our purpose to inspire 
reading, learning, creativity and play. We commenced a project to 
make our brand positioning clearer, which is being rolled out this 
Christmas and includes the introduction of our new Time Well Spent 
strapline. This captures the important role that we play in supporting 
families with affordable, feel-good ways to spend their time and 
connecting people with screen-free things to do.
•	 Improved our product proposition through the introduction of 
new toys and games ranges, which performed particularly well in 
H1. We relaunched our kids’ book range during spring 2024, with 
a much clearer offer from baby and toddler through to fiction 
books for young adults, including the introduction of more 
fun-learning books and a broader range of kids’ fiction titles. 
Enhancing our online proposition
•	 Delivered improvements to the retail website to enhance 
the customer experience, supported by new analytical tools 
including revamping our homepage, optimising product pages 
and improving navigation across the site. These changes have 
seen an improvement on all key metrics, including conversion, 
and have laid the foundation for further improvements in FY25. 
•	 Actively tested new trading mechanics to determine the most 
effective strategies for engaging our customers, testing a mix 
of limited-time discounts, web exclusives and bundles, as well as 
delivery initiatives to give better choice on delivery. Early results 
indicate that targeted promotions have not only increased sales 
but also enhanced key KPIs such as average order value (AOV) 
and profit per order. 
•	 As part of our broader efforts to improve profitability across the 
business, we implemented changes to our online channel in H2, 
for example increasing the free delivery threshold and increasing 
delivery charges. This impacted sales but improved profitability. 
Optimising our store estate 
•	 Focused on maintaining the overall quality of our store portfolio, 
ensuring we have the right stores in the right locations for our 
customers. This included 9 openings, 24 closures, 5 relocations 
and 21 refits. The business traded from 511 stores at the year end, 
of which 96% are profitable. 
•	 The majority of closures were of loss-making or low-profit stores 
where we were unable to agree suitable terms with the landlord. 
New stores performed in line with their internal forecasts and 
should deliver strong payback of approximately one year. 
•	 Successfully negotiated with landlords on FY24 lease renewals, 
delivering £0.8m in annual rent savings. 
Product inspiration
Our Toys buying team took an inspirational trip to Chicago 
in FY24, and while it was there identified a trend in ‘Busy Bags’. 
The pack it developed exclusively for The Works includes 
a selection of all our best-selling kids’ products, and provides 
parents with a great alternative to keep kids entertained and 
away from too much screen time. It is perfect when on the go 
as it all comes in a handy zip-seal bag and is incredible value 
at just £5.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
08

Driving operational improvements
•	 Moved our online fulfilment centre, operated by a third-party 
provider, iForce, to a more efficient facility in early January, which 
is expected to save c.£1m per year in operating costs.
•	 Strengthened Distribution Centre management to help embed 
improved ways of working and deliver benefits and efficiencies 
in the 2024 calendar year and beyond.
•	 Following a successful pilot in 2023, began rollout of new 
EPOS software (completed in July 2024) that, in time, will enable 
improved functionality on our tills in stores, enabling colleagues 
to spend more time on the shop floor and respond to customers’ 
requests quickly and efficiently.
Leadership and Operating Board changes 
There have been a number of changes in leadership during the 
year, at both an Operating and plc Board level. I would like to take 
this opportunity to thank those who have departed and to welcome 
our new leadership team and Board members, who all bring 
a wealth of experience. 
After the period end, we announced that Carolyn Bradley would 
be stepping down as Chair and Steve Bellamy had been appointed 
as her successor. I would like to thank Carolyn for her support over 
the last few years, which has been hugely valuable during a period 
of significant change at The Works. I look forward to working with Steve 
and am confident that together with our streamlined Operating Board 
the business has the right leadership structure and experience to set 
a clear plan to transform our business, and deliver against it, to ensure 
we return to growth and deliver increased value for shareholders.
Colleagues
I am proud that The Works maintained such strong colleague 
engagement scores in FY24, placing 15th in the Best Big Companies 
to Work For and 10th in Retail Week’s top 50 happiest retailers to 
work for. I am hugely grateful to our team of fantastic colleagues 
for adapting and going above and beyond when faced with 
challenging trading conditions and such extensive change across 
the business. It is testament to their hard work and dedication, as 
well as the supportive, positive culture at The Works, that we ended 
the year on a more positive trajectory. 
ESG
As a business, we remain committed to ‘doing business better’ 
and to making positive and sustainable changes which will enable 
us to continue to inspire reading, learning, creativity and play for 
generations to come. 
We are taking steps to progress our ambition to be ‘net zero’ 
in Scope 1 by 2035, Scope 2 by 2030 and Scope 3 by 2045, with 
an ambition to achieve Scope 3 by 2040 to align with the BRC’s 
climate action roadmap. We also made good progress in the year 
to support both Our People and Our Planet as outlined in pages 25 
to 29 of this report.
Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement
Brand proposition and customer engagement
Building on our purpose of inspiring reading, learning, creativity 
and play, this year we have launched our new creative platform. 
Our new strapline #TimeWellSpent reminds customers that the 
most valuable resource we have isn’t money, it’s time, and that 
there’s a joy in spending it wisely. There’s also a nod to the value 
we offer; money spent at The Works is money wisely spent. With 
a new brand lock-up, ‘Time Well Spent’ will start to live and 
breathe across our stores, our websites and our communications, 
connecting emotionally with existing and new customers.
Outlook 
Although not where we had hoped to be going into the year, we are 
pleased to have finished FY24 in line with revised market expectations. 
This reflects the actions taken to reset our cost base and improve 
margins, supported by improving sales in the final quarter and the 
business is in a much stronger position as a result.
Despite inflation falling and interest rates beginning to ease, the 
consumer environment remains subdued and we are yet to see a 
tangible improvement in consumer spend. We expect trading 
conditions to continue to be tough in FY25, with cost headwinds 
such as the higher National Living Wage, freight and business rates 
remaining. However, I am confident that the changes we have 
implemented across the business make us well placed to offset 
these factors and am encouraged both by the solid sales 
performance since the year end and the fact that that we are well 
placed operationally to maximise sales during our peak Christmas 
trading period. We expect to deliver stable sales and an improved 
EBITDA in FY25 and over the medium term our ambition is to return 
to pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA margins of 5%.
Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer 
1 October 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
09
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Our market review 
We are uniquely positioned 
in the value retail sector
Our purpose, which is inspiring our customers to read, learn, create and play, sets us apart. We offer 
lower prices than the specialists and more choice and better customer service than the discounters.
Spending trends 
Evolving shopping habits
Market drivers
While there is an improving outlook for discretionary spend, 
real household disposable income will not recover in the short 
term, with the bottom half of the income distribution not expected 
to recover to pre-pandemic levels until 2027/28. For the core 
demographic of customers who shop at The Works, money is 
tight and they are seeking good value quality products.
Our response 
Our price proposition, range and convenience position us well. 
We believe in great value, offering a range of products that are 
accessible and affordable to all. We are focused on delivering 
key value entry prices and our key multi-buy promotions across 
books, jigsaws and gifting. We offer a point of difference in the 
market. Our proposition also appeals to higher demographic 
customers allowing us to benefit from their increasing 
disposable income.
Market drivers
Despite an uncertain macroeconomic backdrop and 
consumers being more cost conscious than ever, demand 
for convenient and enjoyable shopping experiences continues 
to grow.
Our response 
Our strategy is focused on making the overall shopping 
experience as straightforward and convenient as possible 
for customers shopping in store and online.
During the year we continued to optimise our store estate 
ensuring we have the right stores in the right locations for 
our customers. We opened 9 new stores, closed 24 stores, 
relocated 5 others and completed refits of 21 existing stores. 
Our aim is to provide better in-store experiences through 
improved space planning, making our stores easier to shop in 
(e.g. by reducing the number of fixtures and amount of stock 
on the shop floor) and enhancing our click & collect channel. 
Link to strategy	
Link to strategy	
 
 
 
 
 
 
Premium/full price
Discount/value
General variety
Specialist
Books
Crafts
Stationery
Toys
 Read more about our strategy on pages 14 to 15
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
10

Enhance our online proposition
In our ongoing efforts to enhance our online offer and profitability, 
we have been actively testing trading mechanics to determine 
the most effective strategies for engaging our customers. We 
have been testing a mix of limited-time discounts on next day 
delivery, web exclusives and bundles, as well as delivery initiatives 
to give better choice on delivery (free next day delivery options, 
faster click & collect and Evri Parcel Shop). Early results indicate 
that targeted promotions have not only increased sales but also 
enhanced key KPIs such as average order value and profit per 
order. As we continue to test we will be fully analysing this data 
and refining our promotional approaches to ensure we deliver 
compelling offers that resonate with our audience as well as 
delivering profitable growth.
A range aligned to our purpose 
in all our markets
Connecting people with 
screen-free things to do
Market drivers
We have good demand in four diverse product pillars, with 
the highest shopped category being Books and the highest 
growth in sales in Toys & Games. 
Our response 
Our point of difference is an amazing product proposition that 
is unique to us, is in line with our purpose and great value. Known 
for genuinely caring about and delivering to, our purpose through 
our product offer and customer communication to ‘inspire 
reading, learning, creativity and play - making lives more 
fulfilled’ is what gives us a competitive edge in the market. 
We offer a diversity of product supporting families with 
affordable, feel-good ways to spend their time with products 
that surprise and delight with innovation and a momentum 
of newness.
Market drivers
Money is tight, and the world is changing incredibly fast. 
In a world full of screens and overload, people want to find 
other ways to connect and spend their time.
Our response 
We believe there’s so much to learn from page-turning and 
colourful doodling, that hands are for crafting as well as for 
clicking and that the best play is messy and loud. We welcome 
customers through our doors and help them find inspiration 
amongst our incredible range of feel-good things to do. 
Things that won’t break the bank and will help people 
connect; with each other and themselves. We are within 
reach locally in a store or online, full of friendly advice and 
crafty ideas. We are here for important things like pocket 
money spend, party times, puzzles and presents; to help 
customers find new passions, re-discover old ones and ignite 
new imaginations. At The Works we enable people to enter 
a world of reading, learning creativity and play, pause the 
screen and connect them with screen-free things to do.
Link to strategy	
Link to strategy	
 
 
 
 
 
 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
11
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Evolving and growing our business 
to make it better, not just bigger
 Read more about our strategy on pages 14 and 15.
Our business model
Building on our core strengths
Our core strengths and competitive advantage create a compelling 
proposition capable of delivering long-term value for all stakeholders.
Colleagues
•	 Approximately 4,000 colleagues 
who are key to the success 
of our business.
•	 Loyal and dedicated.
•	 Highly engaged.
Brand value
•	 Exclusive own brands developed 
in house.
•	 Clear purpose, focused on 
inspiring reading, learning, 
creativity and play.
•	 Time Well Spent to be launched 
in FY25.
Suppliers
•	 Approximately 250 supplier 
relationships.
•	 Located in the UK, Europe and Asia.
•	 Close collaboration.
Infrastructure
•	 Store network.
•	 Online store.
•	 Centrally located Support 
and Distribution Centres.
•	 IT infrastructure – investing 
to ensure scale, efficiency 
and security.
 Read more about 
our colleagues 
on page 26.
Key inputs
Our proposition and how we create value
Our competitive 
advantage
Affordable
Customer focused
Family friendly
Convenient
Multi-channel 
Empowering
Design and innovate
•	 Identify and bring desirable and 
on-trend products to the UK market.
•	 Unique own brand products developed 
by in-house design studio in conjunction 
with suppliers.
•	 New product lines launched 
throughout the year.
•	 Four clear product zones: Books; Arts 
& Crafts; Toys & Games; and Stationery, 
complemented by seasonal offerings.
11
own brands
10
sub-brands
c.6,500
new product lines 
introduced in FY24
Enhance our 
online proposition
Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
12

Our people
Employment and a rewarding career 
for c.4,000 colleagues. 
15th 
Best Big Company 
to Work For
Our customers
Offer affordable, accessible, good 
quality products to inspire reading, 
learning, creativity and play.
Our community
£195k
fundraising in FY24 for Cancer 
Research UK, Mind, SAMH, Inspire 
and National Literacy Trust. Many 
other local charities supported 
at store level.
Our shareholders
We are focused on realising 
the significant growth potential 
through generating medium-term 
profit growth and enhanced 
shareholder value.
The value we create
Source and distribute
•	 Experienced buying team sources 
and curates product ranges, including 
popular brands to complement own 
brand offer.
•	 Relationships with approximately 
250 suppliers.
•	 Work closely with suppliers to ensure 
product safety and quality control.
•	 Warehousing and store distribution 
undertaken from 157,000 sq ft facility 
in Coleshill, Birmingham.
•	 Online orders fulfilled by third party 
or picked in store.
•	 Leading customer delivery proposition.
c.250
stock suppliers
157,000
sq ft retail warehousing 
and distribution facility
Sell to customers 
through convenient 
channels
•	 Stores across the UK and Ireland.
•	 Website – 24/7 trading with exclusive 
and extended ranges.
•	 Marketplaces (e.g. Amazon, eBay).
•	 Click & collect – linking stores 
and online.
511
stores
Drive operational
improvements
Optimise our 
store estate
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
13
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Our strategy and progress
Develop our brand and increase 
our customer engagement
Enhance our online proposition
Strategy
Against the backdrop of challenging trading conditions and constrained 
profitability we took the decision to scale back investments in some areas 
and refocus our efforts on stabilising profitability. Despite this, our teams 
rallied together and delivered good strategic progress in FY24. Our strategy 
is currently under review and will communicate this in the early part of 2025.
Progress
•	 Recruited a new Commercial Director to lead our overall 
product, sourcing and quality strategy, and to ensure our 
product proposition continues to evolve and is aligned with 
our purpose. 
•	 Improved our product proposition through the introduction of 
new toys and games ranges, which performed particularly well 
in H1. We relaunched our kids’ book range during spring 2024, 
with a much clearer offer from baby and toddler through to 
fiction books for young adults, including the introduction of more 
fun-learning books and a broader range of kids’ fiction titles.
•	 Continued to evolve our brand to fulfil our purpose to inspire 
reading, learning, creativity and play. We commenced a project 
to make our brand positioning clearer, which is being rolled 
out this Christmas and includes the introduction of our new 
Time Well Spent strapline. This captures the important role 
we play in supporting families with affordable, feel‑good 
ways to spend their time and connecting people with 
screen-free things to do.
Progress
•	 Delivered improvements to the website to enhance the 
customer experience, supported by new analytical tools 
including revamping our homepage, optimising product pages 
and improving navigation across the site. These changes have 
seen an improvement on all key metrics, including conversion, 
and have laid the foundation for further improvements in 2024. 
•	 Actively tested new trading mechanics to determine 
the most effective strategies for engaging our customers, 
testing a mix of limited-time discounts, web exclusives and 
bundles, as well as delivery initiatives to give better choice 
on delivery. Early results indicate that targeted promotions 
have not only increased sales but also enhanced key KPIs 
such as average order value and profit per order.
•	 As part of our broader efforts to improve profitability 
across the business, we implemented changes to our online 
channel in H2, for example increasing the free delivery threshold 
and increasing delivery charges. This impacted sales but 
improved profitability.
Priorities for FY25
•	 Design and embed a new brand framework across the 
business to support the launch of Time Well Spent.
•	 Continued evolution of product proposition under the 
direction of the new Commercial Director.
Priorities for FY25
•	 Improve our digital analytics capabilities to support data 
driven decisions for tactical trading plans and for future 
strategic initiatives. 
•	 Continue to focus on improving the profitability of the website 
through increasing average order value whilst reducing cost 
to serve.
Links
Link to KPIs
A  B
Link to risks
1  2  3  4  5  
6  7  8  9  10  11
Links
Link to KPIs
A  B  C  D  E
Link to risks
1  2  3  4  6  
7  8  10  11
 Our KPIs are set out on page 16	
 Our principal risks are set out on pages 38 to 43
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
14

Optimise our store estate 
Drive operational 
improvements
Progress
•	 Focused on maintaining the overall quality of our store 
portfolio, ensuring we have the right stores in the right 
locations for our customers. This included 9 openings, 
24 closures, 5 relocations and 21 refits. The business traded 
from 511 stores at the year end, of which over 96% 
are profitable. 
•	 New stores performed in line with their investment models 
and with strong payback of c.12 months. The majority of 
closures were of loss-making or low-profit stores where 
we were unable to agree suitable terms with the landlord. 
•	 Successfully negotiated with landlords on FY24 lease 
renewals, delivering £0.8m in annual rent savings. 
Progress
•	 Moved our online fulfilment centre, operated by 
a third‑party provider, iForce, to a more efficient facility 
in early January, which is expected to save c.£1m per year 
in operating costs.
•	 Strengthened Distribution Centre management to help 
embed new ways of working and deliver the expected 
benefits and efficiencies in the 2024 calendar year.
•	 Following a successful pilot in 2023, began rollout of new 
EPOS software (completed in July 2024) that will enable 
improved functionality on our tills in stores, enabling 
colleagues to spend more time on the shop floor and 
respond to customers’ requests quickly and efficiently.
Priorities for FY25
•	 Continue to drive rent savings with a particular focus 
on marginally performing stores.
•	 Focus on improving the estate through selective refits, 
relocations, closures of underperforming stores and 
opening of a small number of carefully selected stores.
•	 Increase in-store sale densities.
Priorities for FY25
•	 Continue to enhance stock flows with a particular 
focus on the top performing stores.
•	 Formalise IT system roadmap to support strategic 
system changes.
Links
Link to KPIs
A  B  C  D  E
Link to risks
1  2  7  10  11  
Links
Link to KPIs
C  D  E
Link to risks
1  2  7  10  11  
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
15
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

How we measure performance
We use five KPIs to monitor 
performance and strategic progress 
These KPIs, together with our performance against them, are detailed below. All of the non-GAAP 
financial measures detailed can be calculated from the GAAP measures included in the financial 
statements, as outlined in the notes to the financial statements. Commentary on these KPIs is included 
in the Financial review.
FY24
FY24
FY24
FY24
FY24
£280.1m
FY23
FY23
FY23
FY23
FY23
£264.6m
FY22
FY22
FY22
FY22
FY22
£282.6m
£9.0m
£16.6m
£6.0m
 Restated – £5.3m
£16.5m
£3.2m
 Restated – 9.1p
25.6p
4.2p
 +4.2%
 +10.5%
A  Revenue growth
+0.9%
B  Like-for-like (LFL) sales growth
(0.9%)
C  Adjusted profit before tax
£3.2m
D  Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA
£6.0m
E  Adjusted diluted earnings per share
4.2p
Definition
The percentage year-on-year change in Group 
total sales which excludes VAT and is stated after 
deducting the cost of loyalty points. A reconciliation 
between total sales and statutory revenue is 
included on page 88.
Definition
The FY24 and FY23 like-for-like (LFL) sales 
decrease/increase has been calculated with 
reference to the previous year’s comparative 
sales figures. In FY24, 53 weeks has been compared 
to the equivalent 53 week period in FY23. In FY22, 
two-year comparatives were used because the 
use of a normal one-year LFL comparative was 
prevented by the various disruptions to store 
trading brought about by COVID-19 restrictions in 
the FY21 comparative period. LFL sales are defined 
by the Group as the year-on-year growth in gross 
sales from stores which have been trading for a full 
financial year prior to the current year and have 
been trading throughout the current financial 
period being reported on, and from the Company’s 
online store, calculated on a calendar week basis.
Definition
Represents profit for the period before taxation 
and Adjusting items. Adjusting items are gains 
or losses incurred in a period which are not 
expected to be recurring. 
Definition
Represents profit for the period before IFRS 16, 
net finance costs, taxation, depreciation and 
amortisation, loss on disposals of property, 
plant and equipment and Adjusting items.
Definition
Calculated by dividing the Adjusted profit for the 
period attributable to ordinary shareholders by 
the weighted average number of ordinary shares 
in issue during the period (including dilutive share 
options). Adjusted profit is before the impact of 
Adjusting items.
(0.9%)
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
16

Financial review
Overview
The result for FY24 was in line with the revised forecast announced 
by the Group in November 2023 and reflects the refocus on tighter 
cost control and improving gross margins. 
FY24
FY23
(Restated)1
Revenue 
£282.6m
£280.1m
Revenue growth
0.9%
5.8%
LFL sales2
(0.9%)
4.2%
Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA3
£6.0m
£9.0m
Profit before tax
£6.9m
£9.0m
Net cash at bank4
£1.6m
£10.2m
The FY24 accounting period relates to the 53 weeks ended 
5 May 2024 (also referred to as the period) and the comparative FY23 
accounting period relates to the 52 weeks ended 30 April 2023.
•	 Revenue increased by £2.5m (+0.9%) compared with the prior 
period due, in part to an extra week of trading and LFL store sales 
growth of 0.6%, along with the effect of closing a net 15 stores 
in the period. Online sales declined by 12.4%, as we focused 
on improving profitability, pulling total sales growth lower. 
•	 Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA of £6.0m, compared to £9.0m in the 
prior period, reflects lower than anticipated sales and significant 
cost headwinds. We partially offset some of these headwinds 
through proactive operational changes at the start of the year. 
In light of lower sales ahead of and during the peak trading period, 
we took further action to refocus on improving gross margins and 
further reduce costs post-Christmas. This resulted in us achieving 
the forecast for FY24. 
•	 Group profit before tax includes a credit of £3.7m (restated FY23: 
£3.6m credit) of Adjusting items, comprising of a £1.4m reversal of 
impairment charges (as a result of following the requirements of the 
IFRS 16 accounting standard), (restated FY23: charge £1.1m), and 
£3.5m (FY23: £4.7m) profit on disposal of right of use assets and 
lease liabilities. These were partially offset by other non-recurring 
costs of £1.2m relating to the Group’s move to AIM (£0.5m) and 
restructuring costs (£0.7m).
•	 The Group ended the period with net cash of £1.6m. The comparable 
52-week period to 28 April 2024 ended with net cash of £6.5m, 
which compares to net cash of £10.2m at the end of FY23. The 
Group continues to have access to, and utilises, a revolving credit 
facility (RCF) of £20.0m to support the build of stock prior to 
peak trading (pages 84 to 86).
•	 As part of the Company’s move to AIM, the fixed charge covenant 
was successfully renegotiated under the Group’s banking facility, 
thereby creating additional headroom when modelling the various 
scenarios in the Board’s going concern assessment. The accounts 
have therefore been prepared on a going concern basis with no 
inclusion of a material uncertainty (pages 84 to 86).
•	 In light of the lower profit delivered in FY24, the Board will not be 
proposing a final dividend in relation to FY24. Future shareholder 
distributions will be kept under consideration as profitability 
improves and net cash allows.
The result for FY24 was in 
line with market expectations, 
reflecting our focus on tighter 
cost control and action taken 
to grow gross margins.”
Rosie Fordham
Chief Financial Officer
Well positioned to return to profit 
growth in FY25
1	 See Note 15 to the financial statements for information relating 
to the prior period adjustment.
2	 53-week LFL sales growth has been calculated with reference to the 
prior 53-week comparative sales period. LFL sales growth is the growth 
in gross sales from stores which have been trading for the full financial 
period (current and previous year), and from the Group’s online store. 
3	 See Note 4 to the financial statements.
4	 Net cash at bank excluding finance leases, on a pre-IFRS 16 basis.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
17
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Financial review continued
Overview continued
The Group refers to alternative performance measures (APMs) as 
it believes these provide management and other stakeholders with 
additional information which may be helpful. These measures are 
used by management in running the business, and include pre-IFRS 16 
Adjusted EBITDA (EBITDA) and like-for-like (LFL1) sales. Accordingly, 
reference is made to these measures in this report. 
Due to rounding, numbers presented throughout this document 
may not add up precisely to the totals provided and percentages 
may not precisely reflect the absolute figures.
Revenue analysis
Total revenue grew 0.9% to £282.6m in FY24 (FY23: £280.1m). LFL1 
sales were down 0.9%, with stores +0.6% and online -12.4%. 
LFL sales growth
Stores
Online
Total
Q1
6.4%
(13.1%)
4.5%
Q2
1.2%
(11.8%)
(0.5%)
H1
3.5%
(12.2%)
1.6%
Q3
(3.4%)
(11.0%)
(4.4%)
Q4
1.6%
(14.0%)
0.2%
H2
(1.5%)
(11.8%)
(2.8%)
Full year
0.6%
(12.4%)
(0.9%)
H1 headlines
•	 Group performed well against an increasingly challenging 
economic environment. Total LFL sales increased by 1.6% with 
stores +3.5%.
•	 Early summer trading was particularly strong, with performance 
supported by the launch of our new summer ‘out to play’ ranges, 
and expansion of our toys and games offering. Annualising 
against the residual impact of our late FY22 cyber-attack also 
supported comparatives.
•	 Towards the end of the half, our new and extended Halloween 
range performed well; however, overall performance was 
suppressed against a wider backdrop of increasing inflationary 
pressures and cost-of-living challenges, which resulted in an 
increased level of discounting across the wider retail market.
H2 headlines
•	 H2 LFL sales declined by 2.8%, reflecting a 4.4% reduction in Q3 
and a more stable Q4 increase of 0.2%.
•	 Performance remained challenging through peak Christmas 
trading. Family finances were under increasing pressure, meaning 
many customers shifted spend to essentials rather than discretionary 
gifting. We maintained a level of promotional discounting across 
Q3 to echo the wider market and remain competitive, whilst also 
executing a more prominent January sale.
•	 We also faced temporary operational efficiency challenges 
as we ran out of space in our Distribution Centre, which created 
short-term disruption to the flow of stock in the run up to peak 
trading. This challenge eased post-Christmas which, along with 
range improvements, supported the improvement in LFL sales in Q4.
Store numbers
FY24
FY23
Stores at beginning of period
 526 
 525 
Opened in the period
 9 
 17 
Closed in the period
 (24)
 (16)
Relocated (excluded from opened/
closed above, nil net effect on 
store numbers)
5
3
Stores at end of period
511
526
We were trading from 511 stores at the period end, of which 
approximately 96% are profitable on an annual basis. Our store estate 
represents c.90% of sales and delivered positive LFL sales in the period. 
The number of stores trading reduced by 15 during the period. The 
change in store estate was heavily weighted towards the second half of 
the financial period, with 12 net closures post-Christmas. We continued 
to optimise the portfolio and close low-profit and loss-making stores 
where we were not able to agree a commercial rent with landlords 
whilst continuing to look to add new stores that fit our profile. 
The 14 new stores opened in the period (including relocations) 
performed well overall and in line with their investment case, which 
should see payback of around one year.
Product gross margin and gross profit
FY24
FY23
(Restated)
% of
 
% of Variance Variance
£m
revenue
£m
revenue
£m
%
Revenue
282.6 
280.1 
2.5 
0.9 
Less: cost of 
goods sold 
(120.5)
(118.8)
(1.7)
(1.4)
Product gross 
margin
162.1 
57.3 
161.3 
57.6
0.8
0.5
Store payroll
(50.2)
(17.8)
(46.8)
(16.7)
(3.4)
(7.3)
Store property 
and establishment 
costs
(49.3)
(17.4)
(51.8)
(18.5)
2.5 
4.8 
Store PoS and 
transaction fees
(2.7)
(1.0)
(2.3)
(0.8)
(0.4)
(17.4)
Online variable 
costs 
(15.8)
(5.6)
(18.4)
(6.6)
2.6 
14.1 
Total non-product 
related cost 
of sales
(118.0)
(41.8)
(119.4)
(42.6)
1.4 
1.2 
Store 
depreciation
(1.9)
(0.7)
(3.7)
(1.3)
1.8 
49.0 
Adjusting items
3.7 
13.1 
3.6
1.3
(0.1) 
(2.8)
IFRS 16 impact 
5.9 
2.1 
6.1
2.8 
0.2
3.3
Gross profit 
per financial 
statements
51.8 
18.3 
47.9 
17.1 
3.9 
8.1 
The product gross margin rate decreased by 30bps to 57.3% 
(FY23: 57.6%). Notable factors influencing year-on-year comparisons 
are as follows:
•	 Evolving product mix: our new toys and games ranges drove 
incremental sales and saw double digit growth in the period; 
however, these attract a lower margin percentage. The continued 
growth in front-list adult fiction books also pulled the rate lower.
•	 The additional promotional activity across peak reduced the 
gross margin percentage. 
•	 The hedged FX rate on payments made in US dollars remained 
a headwind through the period. The FY24 hedged US dollar: 
GB pound rate was 1.22 versus 1.36 in FY23. 
•	 A reduction in container freight rates versus 2022 rates: average 
container rates paid during FY24 were $2k versus FY23 of $6k.
•	 Q4 margin improved versus FY23, supported by reduced 
promotional activity and the impact of a focus on stronger 
negotiations with suppliers. This activity supports the expected 
improvement in margin rates in FY25, despite the higher freight 
rates currently being experienced.
1	 53-week LFL sales growth has been calculated with reference to the prior 53-week comparative sales period. LFL sales growth is the growth in gross sales 
from stores which have been trading for the full financial period (current and previous year), and from the Group’s online store.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
18

Drive operational improvements 
– iForce move to Corby
Our e-commerce Distribution Centre is operated by our 
third-party provider, iForce. During the year we agreed with 
iForce to move to a more modern Distribution Centre with 
much higher levels of automation and increased efficiencies.
•	 21% reduction in our operating space leading to lower 
occupancy costs. 
•	 Increased pick rate (nearly three times faster than a manual 
pick process) leading to lower cost per item to dispatch 
allowing greater flexibility in what we can sell profitably 
through our website.
The move took place in January 2024 and is so far delivering 
savings that are expected to result in a reduction of c.£1.0m 
per annum in operating costs. 
Non-product related costs of sales decreased by £1.4m in FY24, 
made up of: 
Store payroll costs increased by £3.4m, in part due to the 
additional week of trading which increased costs by £0.9m. 
Underlying costs increased due to:
•	 Changes to our store labour structure implemented at the start 
of the period partially mitigated the impact of the 9.7% increase 
in the National Living and Minimum Wage (NLMW) in April 2023 
and the corresponding retail management increases.
•	 A further hours efficiency programme implemented towards 
the end of the financial period is expected to deliver significant 
savings across FY25, helping to mitigate further NLMW related 
cost headwinds. 
Store property and establishment costs reduced by £2.5m. 
The additional week of trading increased costs by £1.0m, whilst 
underlying costs reduced by £3.5m. 
•	 The majority of the reduction was driven by business rates. 
£2.8m related to the 2023 business rates revaluation and 
a further £0.6m of credits were received from historical 
backdated rate reductions.
•	 The renegotiation of expiring leases across the LFL store estate 
resulted in a reduction in rents which was further supported by 
the release of rent accruals established where the effective date 
of the rent decrease was back dated to a prior period (in these 
situations, we continue to accrue for the higher rent level until 
the reduction is confirmed in writing).
•	 Full period electricity costs increased £1.6m as previously 
contracted hedging agreements resulted in a slower unwind 
of market led energy price reductions. 
Online variable costs decreased by £2.6m. This was primarily 
due to lower sales volumes; however, ongoing work to improve 
the overall profitability of the online business further supported 
the cost reduction and helped mitigate inflationary increases. 
Annualised cost savings of c.£1.0m are on track to be delivered 
through FY25 following the move of our online fulfilment centre 
operated by a third-party provider (iForce) to a more efficient 
facility in January 2024.
Operating profit and pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA
FY24
FY23 (Restated)
% of
 
% of Variance Variance
£m
revenue
£m
revenue
£m
%
Gross profit per 
financial 
statements
51.8
18.3
47.9
17.1
3.9
8
Distribution 
expenses
(12.7)
 4.5
(10.3)
 3.7
(2.4)
23 
Administrative 
expenses
(27.7)
9.8
(24.2)
8.6
(3.5)
14 
Operating profit
11.4
4.0
13.4
4.8
(2.0)
15
Less depreciation, 
amortisation and 
IFRS 16 included 
in operating profit 
(1.7)
0.6
(0.8)
0.9
0.9
113
Adjusting items
(3.7)
1.3
(3.6)
0.1
0.1
3
Pre-IFRS 16 
Adjusted EBITDA
6.0 
2.1
9.0
3.2
(3.0) 
33
Distribution costs (before depreciation and IFRS 16) comprising 
of picking stock and delivering it to stores increased by £2.4m 
compared with FY23. 52-week distribution labour costs increased 
by £1.8m, due to wage rate inflation from the increase in the NLMW. 
Costs were further impacted by a reduction in efficiencies resulting 
from the Distribution Centre capacity issues experienced in the run 
up to peak as previously outlined. Increased outbound pallet volumes 
resulted in a £0.4m increase in third-party pallet delivery costs. 
The movement to a new way of working in the Distribution Centre, 
supported by strengthened management, is expected to drive 
efficiencies to offset the further increase in NLMW in April 2024.
Administration costs (before depreciation and IFRS 16) increased 
by £2.8m compared to FY23. 52-week Support Centre salary and 
related costs increased by £1.3m due to inflationary increases 
experienced at the start of the financial period, and the annualising 
of structural changes implemented in late FY23. The benefit of the 
structural changes made in late FY24, related to the restructure of 
the Operating Board, had limited benefit to FY24, but will support a 
lowering of our ongoing cost base from FY25. IT infrastructure costs 
increased by £0.8m as we continued to roll out our new EPOS 
system and invest in the strengthening of our IT security. 
Adjusting items were £3.7m credit in FY24 (restated FY23: £3.6m 
credit) and include other non-recurring costs of £1.2m relating to 
the Group’s move to AIM (£0.5m) and restructuring costs (£0.7m). 
These costs are more than offset by a credit of £1.4m (restated 
FY23: impairment charge £1.1m), resulting from the reversal of 
impairment charges relating to the notional right of use asset 
created as a result of following the requirements of the IFRS 16 
accounting standard and £3.5m (restated FY23: £4.7m) profit on 
disposal of right of use assets and lease liabilities. This is described 
in Note 15 of the financial statements. 
A reconciliation of statutory profit to EBITDA can be found in Note 4 
of the financial statements.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
19
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Financial review continued
Net financing expense
Net financing costs in the period were £4.5m (FY23: £4.4m), £4.0m 
(FY23: £4.1m) of which related to IFRS 16 notional interest. 
Gross cash interest payable was £0.4m, in relation to facility 
availability charges (FY23: £0.3m).
Tax
FY24
£m
FY23
(Restated)
£m
Current tax expense/(credit)
—
(0.4) 
Deferred tax expense
0.5
—
Total tax expense/(credit)
0.5
(0.4)
The impairment charges and reversals reduced the taxable profits 
of prior periods and created available brought forward tax losses, 
which significantly reduced the effective tax rate and overall tax 
charge for FY24 and FY23. As a result, there was a net tax charge of 
£0.5m (restated FY23: £0.4m credit) consisting of a £nil current tax 
credit and a £0.5m deferred tax charge. The £0.5m overall tax charge 
equated to an effective tax rate of 7.8% (restated FY23: minus 4.4%). 
The average headline corporation tax rate for FY24 was 25.0% 
(FY23: 19.5%). Deferred tax has been calculated at a rate of 25.0% 
in both periods.
Earnings per share
Adjusted basic EPS for the period was 4.2 pence (restated 
FY23: 9.2 pence). Adjusted diluted EPS was 4.2 pence 
(restated FY23: 9.1 pence).
The difference between the Adjusted basic and Adjusted diluted 
EPS figures is due to the exclusion from the diluted EPS calculation 
of outstanding potentially dilutive share options.
Other items
Prior period restatements reflect adjustments wholly related 
to IFRS 16. Further details can be found in Note 15. 
Capital expenditure
Capital expenditure in the period was £5.8m (FY23: £6.7m). 
It predominately relates to:
•	 New stores and relocations £1.6m (FY23: £1.1m): the net 
investment in new stores and relocations increased by £0.5m 
compared with FY23. Nine new stores were opened and five 
stores relocated to new units (FY23: fourteen new stores, three 
relocations). Costs increased despite the reduction in new 
stores due to reduced landlord contributions and additional 
cost inflation. 
•	 Store refits, maintenance and lease renewal costs £2.3m 
(FY23: £3.0m): the net investment in store refits reduced by £0.7m 
compared with FY23. The quantity of refits was lower in FY24 (20) 
vs FY23 (36), reflecting the impact of the decision taken to reduce 
refits to conserve cash, offset, in part, by wider construction industry 
related cost inflation increasing the relative cost per refit. 
•	 IT hardware and software £1.7m (FY23: £2.4m): the net 
investment in IT hardware and software reduced by £0.7m 
compared with FY23. The prior period included incremental 
expenditure relating to the configuration and testing of the 
new store EPOS software prior to its implementation in stores 
during FY24.
FY25 capex is expected to be approximately £5.0m.
Inventory
Stock was valued at £31.4m at the end of the period (FY23: £33.4m), 
a decrease of £2.0m. Tighter stock management supported a 
planned reduction in our period end closing forward cover and 
supports lower markdown activity in FY25. The stock value reflects 
higher stock on water than we would have expected because of the 
extra transit time from China due to the Red Sea challenges. 
Cash flow
The table shows a summarised non-IFRS 16 presentation cash flow. 
The net cash outflow for the period was £8.6m (FY23: outflow of £6.1m). 
FY24
£m
FY23
£m
Variance
£m
Operating profit
11.4
13.4
2.0
Operating cash flows
(8.3)
(6.8)
(1.5)
Net movement in 
working capital
(4.3) 
(2.8) 
(1.5) 
Capital expenditure
(5.8) 
(6.5) 
0.7 
Tax paid
(0.1) 
(1.5) 
1.4 
Interest and 
financing costs
(0.5) 
(0.7) 
0.2 
Dividends
—
(1.5) 
1.5 
Purchase of 
treasury shares
(0.3) 
(0.5) 
0.2 
Cash flow before 
loan movements
(7.9) 
(6.7) 
(1.2) 
Exchange rate 
movements
(0.7) 
0.6 
(1.3) 
Net decrease in cash 
and cash equivalents
(8.6)
(6.1)
(2.5)
Opening net cash 
balance excluding 
IAS 17 leases
10.2
16.3 
Closing net cash 
balance excluding 
IAS 17 leases
1.6
10.2 
The Group ended the period with net cash of £1.6m. Our movement 
in period-end date resulting from the 53rd week meant an additional 
payment run of approximately £5.0m fell due before period end 
compared to the prior financial period. The 52-week period ended 
with net cash of £6.5m, which compares to net cash of £10.2m at 
the end of FY23.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
20

Bank facilities and financial position
The Group continues to have an RCF of £20.0m, which provides 
ample liquidity and is utilised to support the build of stock prior 
to peak trading. The terms of this financing agreement expire 
on 30 November 2026.
Capital distributions 
Considering the reduced profit in FY24, the Board is not proposing 
a dividend for FY24. 
We will continue to keep future shareholder distributions under 
consideration as profitability improves and note some of our major 
shareholders’ preference for share buybacks over the payment 
of dividends. A further update will be made alongside our interim 
results in January 2025 and a new capital allocation policy will 
be set out alongside our new strategy in the first half of 2025.
Employee Benefit Trust funding for the purposes of 
share schemes
To avoid dilution of existing shareholder interests, the Board’s 
intention is to consider purchasing shares in the market to re-issue 
under employee share schemes as it has done in each of the last 
two financial years.
Rosie Fordham
Chief Financial Officer
1 October 2024
Optimising our store estate
During FY24 there was a continued focus on optimising 
the store estate, to ensure we operate the right stores in the 
right locations for our customers and make commercial returns. 
We targeted low-profit and loss-making stores with a focus 
on improving profitability of the estate and sought to improve 
operational performance as well as targeting rent reductions 
on lease renewals. During FY24, 62 leases were renegotiated 
with a total annual rent saving of c.£800k which equates 
to approximately a 24% reduction in the annual rent for those 
stores. We closed 24 stores, the majority of which were 
loss-making or low-profit stores. We opened 9 new stores 
and relocated 5, all of which are performing in-line with their 
investment models and are expected to generate, on average, 
payback of circa 12 months. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
21
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Our stakeholders
Our people
Enable us to fulfil our purpose 
and deliver our strategy.
Our customers
Buy our products.
What matters to them
•	 Safe, healthy and good 
working environment. 
•	 Fair rewards. 
•	 Enjoyable work. 
•	 Being part of a company that 
has a clear purpose and values 
that resonate. 
•	 Engagement and support. 
•	 Development opportunities.
What matters to them
•	 Wide variety of great products. 
•	 Good value and quality. 
•	 Customer experience. 
•	 Reliable and convenient service.
Group-wide engagement
•	 Interaction through various channels 
including MyWorks communications 
and engagement platform and 
regular briefings. 
•	 Annual engagement survey to give 
us an independent view of what 
we are doing well and where we 
can improve. 
•	 Local-level engagement including 
team meetings, video calls 
and briefings.
Group-wide engagement
•	 Active social media engagement. 
•	 Customer surveys and polls. 
•	 Day-to-day interactions between 
customers and store colleagues.
Board-level engagement
•	 Regular Director store visits and 
meetings with senior management 
and store colleagues. 
•	 Presentations to the Board by 
the Chief People and Retail Officer 
covering people and talent strategy, 
development of an Employee Value 
Proposition and linkage to the Group’s 
purpose, culture and strategy. 
•	 Chief People and Retail Officer 
regularly provides updates at Board, 
and Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee meetings.
Board-level engagement
•	 Regular Director store visits including 
direct engagement with customers. 
•	 Chief Commercial Officer, Chief 
Retail and People Officer and Head 
of Brand regularly provide customer 
feedback to the Board.
Outcomes
•	 Ranked 15th Best Big Company 
to Work For nationally by Best 
CompaniesTM reflecting ‘very good’ 
levels of employee engagement.
Outcomes
•	 Monitor emerging trends and 
create products that customers 
want and need. 
 Read more on page 26
 Read more on page 4 to 5
Our stakeholders and how we 
engage with them are detailed 
on this and the adjacent page. 
To succeed it is essential that 
we understand what matters 
to them and consider this as 
part of our decision-making 
process. Our Section 172 
Companies Act statement 
is set out over the page.
To succeed it is essential that 
we engage with our stakeholders
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
22

Our suppliers
Support our sourcing and 
distribution activities.
Communities
Impacted by our activities.
Shareholders
Seek returns on 
their investment.
What matters to them
•	 Long-term relationships. 
•	 Fair treatment. 
•	 Payment in accordance with 
contractual terms. 
•	 Responsible business practices.
What matters to them
•	 Employment opportunities. 
•	 Positive social impact. 
•	 Sustainable operations.
What matters to them
•	 Competent execution of strategy. 
•	 Good governance. 
•	 Sustainable and growing returns. 
•	 Regular and clear communications 
and transparency. 
•	 ESG performance.
Group-wide engagement
•	 Regular commercial dialogue. 
•	 In-person meetings with suppliers, 
factory visits and attendance 
at trade fairs. 
•	 Our quality assurance team works 
closely with suppliers to ensure product 
safety and quality are integral to the 
supply of our products.
•	 Our sourcing team drives key 
partnerships via robust communication 
and enforcement of supplier standards.
•	 Our sustainability team engages with 
suppliers to investigate and appraise 
their commitments to the environment 
in line with our roadmaps. 
Group-wide engagement
•	 ‘Giving Something Back’ programme 
(see page 27). 
•	 Local community initiatives 
(see page 27).
Group-wide engagement
•	 Extensive investor information, 
including announcements, results 
and presentations, is available 
on the Company’s website.
Board-level engagement
•	 Chief Commercial Officer provides 
regular updates to the Board on 
supplier matters and relationships. 
•	 The Board and Audit Committee 
review the Group’s payment practices.
Board-level engagement
•	 Board oversees development of ESG 
strategy and monitors progress. 
•	 Internal ESG working groups and 
external advisers regularly update 
the Board on relevant ESG matters. 
•	 Board in-depth review of the Group’s 
community engagement activities.
Board-level engagement
•	 Annual General Meeting. 
•	 The Chair and Committee Chairs are 
available to shareholders to discuss 
specific matters as they arise. 
•	 CEO and CFO have regular meetings 
and calls with investors and analysts, 
both directly and through their 
NOMAD, and provide Board updates 
following such engagement.
Outcomes
•	 Board review of payment practices 
ensures that suppliers are treated fairly. 
•	 Promote fair and ethical business 
practices through supply chain 
management.
•	 Development of social and 
ethical compliance programme in 
conjunction with Verisio (see page 29). 
•	 Long-term supplier relationships. 
•	 Increasing collaboration with 
key publishers.
Outcomes
•	 Strengthening ESG strategy given 
growing importance to stakeholders 
(see pages 25 to 29). 
•	 Launched our new corporate and 
charity fundraising partnership with 
the National Literacy Trust (NLT) 
raising £66k in FY24. 
•	 £109k raised in partnership with Mind, 
SAMH and Inspire during FY24.
•	 Successfully trialled ‘Play It Forward’ 
product take-back scheme in 
partnership with Barnardo’s.
Outcomes
•	 Delisted the Company from the LSE Main 
Market, readmitting on AIM given the size 
and structure of the Group, significantly 
reducing compliance cost base.
•	 Reorganised leadership structure, 
enhancing the functional efficiency 
of the Operating Board. 
•	 Strengthening ESG strategy given 
growing importance to stakeholders.
•	 Reconsidered the nature and timing 
of capital distributions.
•	 Approved the appointment and 
reappointment of Board members.
 Read more on page 29
 Read more on page 27
 Read more on page 3
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
23
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Section 172 statement
This disclosure forms the Directors’ statement under Section 414CZA 
of the Companies Act 2006. 
The Directors have had regard to the matters set out in 
Section 172(1) (a) to (f) of the Companies Act 2006 in their 
decision‑making processes.
Both individually and collectively, the Directors believe that they 
have acted in the way they consider, in good faith, would be most 
likely to promote the success of the Company for the benefit of its 
members as a whole (having regard to the stakeholders and 
matters set out in Section 172(1)(a) to (f) of the Companies Act 2006) 
in all decisions taken by the Board during the 53-week period 
ended 5 May 2024 (FY24).
Under Section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006, a director of a 
company must act in the way he or she considers, in good faith, 
would be most likely to promote the success of the Company for 
the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so have 
regard (amongst other matters) to:
•	 The likely consequence of any decision in the long term.
•	 The interests of the Company’s employees.
•	 The need to foster the Company’s business relationships 
with suppliers, customers and others.
•	 The impact of the Company’s operations on the community 
and the environment.
•	 The desirability of the Company maintaining a reputation 
for high standards of business conduct.
•	 The need to act fairly as between members of the Company.
Promoting the Company’s 
long‑term success
AIM move
The Board began to consider the possibility of moving 
the Company’s listing from the Main Market to AIM 
following the finalisation of the FY23 year-end process, 
with the process, benefits and impact discussed over 
the course of a number of Board meetings.
Although there was a short-term impact on 
management time in order to deliver the move, the 
Board’s conclusion was that moving to AIM was in the 
long-term interests of the Company; the AIM regulatory 
regime was considered to be more appropriate for the 
size and structure of the Company, and there was the 
possibility to save significantly on costs related to the 
Main Market listing (particularly around the audit fee) 
with the Board being optimistic that those savings would 
ultimately lead to increased shareholder value. The 
potential impact on shareholders was also considered, 
with particular reference to ensuring that existing major 
shareholders would not be prohibited from maintaining 
their interest following the move to AIM. The Board 
consulted with its key shareholders to assess support 
for the move prior to initiating the project.
Having considered all relevant factors, the Board 
unanimously agreed that recommending the move to 
AIM was in the best interests of the Company and its 
members, having had due regard to relevant factors 
under Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
24

ESG statement
Our mission
As a business, we remain committed to ‘doing 
business better’ and to making positive and 
sustainable changes which will enable us to 
continue to inspire reading, learning, creativity 
and play for generations to come. We continue 
to evolve our ESG strategy, which we have 
refined in FY24 to focus on people and planet.
Our ESG governance
The Board holds overall accountability for approval of the strategy 
for and delivery of the Group’s ESG commitments. A member of 
the Operating Board has been assigned responsibility for each of 
the pillars of our ESG strategy, and is supported by working groups 
across the Group. Further details are shown in the CFD statement 
on pages 30 to 37.
Environmental, social and 
governance (ESG) statement
ESG
C
o
ll
e
a
g
u
e
s
 R
ea
d 
mo
re 
on
 p
ag
e 2
5
C
o
m
m
u
ni
ti
e
s
 R
ea
d 
mo
re
 o
n 
pa
ge
 2
7
E
n
vi
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
a
l
 Re
ad
 m
ore
 o
n p
ag
e 2
8
 Re
ad
 m
ore
 o
n p
ag
e 2
9
S
u
p
p
l
y 
c
h
a
i
n
O
ur
 P
e
o
pl
e
O
ur
 P
la
n
et
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
25
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

ESG statement continued
Colleagues
We care about our people.
We will focus on learning and development, health and 
wellbeing, and diversity and inclusion to help us ensure that 
The Works is an engaging and inspiring place to work.
Our people
Diversity and inclusion (D&I)
We have launched our D&I strategy and are making good progress 
across the four key priorities:
•	 Further improve our understanding of D&I across our business.
•	 Improve D&I training and enhance awareness.
•	 Review our internal processes to ensure barriers to inclusion 
are removed.
•	 Ensure everyone at The Works is accountable for their role 
in creating an inclusive workplace.
Gender Pay Gap Report
Our 2023 Gender Pay Gap Report is available at theworks.co.uk.
As at 5 April 2023, when measured as a median average, hourly 
paid male colleagues were equal to our female colleagues and 
when measured as a mean average the hourly rate of pay for male 
colleagues was 12.1% higher than female colleagues. This is because 
we have more men than women in senior leadership roles, a position 
we are working to address through the implementation of our 
D&I strategy.
The gender diversity profile across the Group as at 5 May 2024 
is detailed below.
 
Male
Female
Board1
4/71%
3/29%
Operating Board2
2/40%
3/60%
Direct reports3
14/50%
14/50%
Senior leadership4
11/58%
8/42%
Other employees5
995/26%
2,805/74%
1	 The Board (see pages 44 and 45) includes three Non-Executive Directors 
and two Executive Directors. 
2	 Information about the members of the Operating Board, which includes 
the two Executive Directors, is available at https://corporate.theworks.
co.uk/who-we-are/our-leadership. As at the date of this Annual Report 
the gender diversity profile of the Operating Board was 2/40% male and 
3/60% female.
3	 Direct reports to senior management (the Operating Board).
4	 Senior leadership includes heads of department or equivalent.
5	 Other employees includes all other colleagues who are permanent employees. 
Our colleagues are fundamental to delivering great customer 
experience in a challenging and competitive retail environment. 
They are what makes The Works so special. Attracting and 
retaining great people is what makes us successful, and our 
culture is key to that.
Each year we invite our colleagues to participate in the Best 
CompaniesTM ‘Make a Difference’ engagement survey. This 
well-recognised third-party survey covers various areas including 
Leadership, My Manager, Personal Growth, Wellbeing, Fair Deal 
and Giving Something Back. As well as completing the set questions, 
colleagues also have the option to add comments on what is great 
about working at The Works and what could be better. 77% of our 
team completed the 2023 full survey and we were awarded a 
one-star rating (with three stars being the highest rating) in 
recognition of very good workplace engagement.
Learning and development
Our learning and development system, the Can-Do Academy, 
provides all colleagues with online learning covering compliance, 
management and leadership skills training. This year we have 
expanded our talent development team and introduced several 
new initiatives including The Works Welcome induction event, 
providing our new Support Centre, Distribution Centre and store 
managers a warm and informative welcome to our team.
Health and wellbeing
Health and safety (H&S)
We take a proactive approach in relation to all H&S matters and 
our aim is to continuously improve our H&S performance. To drive 
continuous improvement we operate a web-based portal and 
online reporting system which allows all stores to immediately 
record accidents, incidents and near misses. Our store managers 
all use streamlined H&S checklists that focus on things they need 
to monitor daily during regular floor walks, including identifying 
potential hazards and ensuring fire escape routes are always 
kept clear. 
Wellbeing
Supporting the wellbeing of our colleagues is a key part of our 
people strategy and our ESG commitments. This April we launched 
our wellbeing strategy to ensure we support all aspects of our 
colleagues’ wellbeing. Colleagues have access to:
•	 MyWorks, our communications and engagement platform, which 
provides information on physical, mental and financial wellbeing.
•	 Our employee Assistance Programme through our partnership 
with the Retail Trust.
•	 Wellbeing Warriors , who are available across the business. 
These colleagues are specifically trained to support the mental 
wellbeing of their peers, act as an impartial, confidential, 
listening ear and provide unbiased support to colleagues.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
26

Giving something back 
Making a difference to society is not only a part of our ESG 
responsibilities, but also part of our culture. We are proud to work 
with national charity partners, and local causes, to give back in 
the communities which we serve. Whether it’s through fancy-dress 
fundraising, our Where’s Wally? Fun Run or an in-store fundraising 
activity, giving something back is part of our everyday life.
We launched our new corporate and charity fundraising 
partnership with the National Literacy Trust (NLT), an independent 
charity working with schools and communities to give disadvantaged 
children the literacy skills to succeed in life.
We have worked, and will continue to work, closely with the NLT 
to improve access to, and awareness of the importance of, literacy 
for all, helping us fulfil our purpose of inspiring reading, learning, 
creativity and play.
We continue to partner with Mind, SAMH and Inspire. This year we 
launched our first commercial charity range that supported all our 
national partners.
Our partnership with World Book Day is a great example of our 
purpose coming to life by inspiring reading, learning, creativity 
and play. As well as selling World Book Day books and redeeming 
vouchers, our colleagues encouraged our customers to develop a 
love for reading through fancy-dress initiatives, story sessions and 
book recommendations, supporting its mission to ‘Read Your Way’. 
We sold more than 205k books supporting children to develop their 
love of reading.
October saw the launch of our trial ‘Play It Forward’ product 
take-back scheme in partnership with Barnardo’s. The successful 
trial provided collection bins for customers and colleagues to donate 
their good quality new and pre-loved books, games, toys and 
stationery in our stores. As part of the partnership Barnardo’s then 
collected these donations to resell in its charity stores to help raise vital 
funds for its work, or recycle items which are not in a resalable condition.
FY24 impact
Cancer Research UK (CRUK)
£17.5k 
£1.3m since August 2016 (partnership closed in FY23)
Mind, SAMH and Inspire 
£109k 
National Literacy Trust (NLT) 
£66k 
Partnership launched in FY24
National partnerships
We care about good ethical business practices and are fully 
committed to conducting business fairly, ethically and with respect 
to fundamental human rights. This includes the prevention of all 
forms of slavery, forced labour or servitude, child labour and human 
trafficking, both in our business and supply chains. Our Modern 
Slavery Statement is available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/
who-we-are/corporate-governance/our-policies.
Communities
We care about giving something back.
We will support both local and national charities & 
organisations which help us achieve our business purpose.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
27
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

ESG statement continued
Environment
We care about our impact on the planet.
We are committed to reducing our carbon footprint, minimising 
waste, and sourcing more environmentally friendly materials 
and products where possible.
Our planet
FY24 progress highlights
Emissions 
Our carbon emissions across Scope 1, 2 and 3 decreased by 8% vs 
FY23, and by 9% vs our FY22 baseline. The majority of this decrease 
came from Scope 3.
FY24 performance
Scope 1
Increased vs FY23 and FY22 baseline year due 
to an increase in company car mileage as a result 
of returning to post-COVID-19 travel. 
Scope 1 emissions make up less than 1% of our total 
carbon footprint.
Scope 2
Increased by 7% vs FY23 but reduced 2.5% vs FY22 
baseline due to an increase in electricity consumption.
Scope 3
Decreased by 8.7% vs FY23 and by 9.4% vs 
FY22 baseline.
Purchased goods and services reduced by 9.8% vs 
FY23 due to an overall decrease in total spend 
on paper products (-22%), which has the highest 
emissions factor compared to other materials used.
Products and packaging
Examples of progress we have made are:
•	 Removed outer shrink wrap packaging from 95% of our kids’ own 
brand jigsaws.
•	 In our PlayWorks and Outdoor Toys ranges, reduced plastic 
packaging, switching to 30% recycled content where possible, 
as well as introducing paper packaging.
•	 Our best-selling ‘Create Your Own Christmas’ bag and stockings 
are now made from 100% recycled bottles.
•	 We hit our FY23 target of increasing the number of books that 
are FSC certified from 45% to 60%.
Plans for FY25
Carbon emission reduction
•	 Develop an energy efficiency behaviour change programme 
for all colleagues.
•	 Engage with landlords to identify and implement energy 
efficiency opportunities across the store estate, tailoring efforts 
where necessary.
Products and packaging
•	 Increase the number of books that are FSC certified across our 
entire books range from 60% in FY24 to 75% by the end of FY25.
•	 Achieve an average of at least 50% of plastic packaging across 
all our imported products containing a minimum of 30%+ recycled 
content for the whole of FY25.
Waste
•	 Reduce the use of packaging in our products and ensure 
compliance with EU and UK regulations.
•	 Improve our recycling rates in our stores, Distribution Centre 
& Support Centre.
Our targets
In FY23 we set the carbon emission reduction targets detailed 
below. Our Scope 1 and Scope 2 targets, together with our 
Scope 3 ambition, align with the British Retail Consortium’s 
climate action roadmap. In FY24 we completed our second 
carbon balance sheet, with an improvement in methodology, 
allowing us to directly compare our footprint for the first time 
against FY23 – which will now be our baseline year.
Scope 1 – Net zero by
2035 
Scope 2 – Net zero by 
2030 
Scope 3 – Net zero by 
20453
1	 Scope 1 consumption and emissions include direct combustion 
of natural gas and fuels utilised for transportation operations. 
Scope 2 consumption and emissions refer to indirect 
emissions related to the consumption of purchased electricity 
in day-to-day business operations. Scope 3 consumption 
and emissions cover emissions resulting from sources 
not directly owned by the Group.
2	 We aspire to achieve our net zero targets through a 90% absolute 
reduction in our emissions and by offsetting the remaining 10%. 
Our targets have been established using a market-based 
methodology and our FY22 carbon emissions performance 
is the baseline against which we will measure our 
absolute reductions.
3	 With an ambition to achieve net zero by 2040. 
Carbon net zero targets1,2
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
28

Supply chain
We care about ethical business practices.
Through robust supplier engagement, regular audits and 
a clear Code of Conduct, we will ensure our suppliers meet 
our expectations when deciding on who, what and where 
we source from.
our total supplier base to map our tier 1 supply chain, whilst also 
capturing factory ethical audit reports as part of the process. 
Supplier standards 
As part of our Supplier On-Boarding process, we require all 
suppliers to sign our Terms and Conditions of Purchase and our 
Ethical Trading Code of Conduct, and agree to the requirements 
set out in our Supplier Manual. 
We have refreshed our Ethical Trading Code of Conduct to contain 
an enhanced set of supplier requirements, which has been signed 
by all active suppliers. 
In FY25 we will be setting out our audit requirements for our own 
brand suppliers and their factories, which will become a mandatory 
condition for purchase. All audit reports obtained as part of this 
ongoing project will be risk assessed by Verisio, using a risk matrix 
defined by the Group, and factories will be graded.
For our branded suppliers and publishers, we will issue 
a Self‑Assessment Questionnaire (SAQ) which will capture 
information required to ensure that they are managing their 
factory sites in line with our requirements.
Sourcing strategy 
In FY24, we have identified the need to develop a process to 
assess our supplier base objectively. We have categorised our 
suppliers into distinct groups based on various parameters, which 
include factors such as the supplier’s significance to the business, 
their performance, the level of risk they pose, and their strategic value.
In FY25, we aim to improve this approach by ensuring 
the categorisation process is as comprehensive as possible, 
capturing tangible feedback based on pre-defined criteria. The 
output of this process will be in the form of a supplier scorecard. 
The supplier scorecard will provide a structured and visual manner 
to comprehend the dynamics of the supplier base, enabling us to 
make informed decisions about supplier management. 
We have identified supplier rationalisation opportunities in order 
to streamline the business’ spend to fewer suppliers and drive better 
value from those relationships. These opportunities will be explored 
further during FY25.
People update
In order to the support the execution of our supply chain objectives, 
this year we have recruited a dedicated sourcing manager whose role 
will be to lead and take ownership for implementing new ways of 
working both internally across the commercial teams and externally 
within our supplier base. This individual is responsible for driving and 
co-ordinating our key supplier relationships, supplier assessment, 
supplier strategy and supplier engagement; maximising efficiencies in 
how we operate and the end-to-end management of our key partners.
During the course of FY24, we have introduced a quality assurance 
team, whose primary responsibilities relate to the management of, and 
adherence to, all applicable product safety, quality and sustainability 
standards within the UK and EU. Since the quality assurance team’s 
inception, we have made significant progress in ensuring our suppliers 
are aligned with our standards in these areas.
Supplier data 
Our goal is to implement a transparent process to understand 
and hold relevant data on our total supplier base, with the ability 
to assess them and engage with them to drive key partnerships. In the 
last year we have laid the foundations for achieving this goal through 
establishing a supplier database so that it can be used as an effective 
tool for stakeholders to understand an individual supplier’s status, 
or to evaluate our supplier base on a more holistic level. 
We have made significant progress in supply chain transparency, 
which has been aided by our recently formed relationship with our 
ethical supply chain partner, Verisio, enabling us to engage with 
Barnardo’s ‘Play It Forward’ 
scheme
In the last year we launched the trial of our ‘Play It Forward’ 
scheme in partnership with Barnardo’s. The scheme enables 
customers and colleagues to donate their good quality new and 
pre-loved books, games, toys and stationery at our donation points 
in store. Barnardo’s resells all good quality items in its charity stores 
to help raise vital funds for its work, or recycles any items which 
are not in a resalable condition. 
After a successful trial, we are looking to roll out the scheme to 
all eligible UK stores in FY25. Working in partnership with Barnardo’s, 
we are pleased to have the opportunity to help our colleagues and 
customers raise funds that will help children, young people, and 
their families to feel safer, happier, healthier and more hopeful.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
29
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Non-financial and sustainability information statement
Climate-related Financial Disclosure (CFD) statement
We have followed the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) framework for the previous 
two years. With our move to AIM on 3 May 2024, we are now mandated by the Climate-related Financial 
Disclosure (CFD) requirements under the Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate-related Financial Disclosure) 
Regulations 2022. We have complied with all of the eight BEIS mandatory CFD requirements under the 
Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate-related Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022.
Overview 
With over 500 stores in the UK and Ireland, the Group’s business 
focuses on selling a wide variety of books, toys, arts, crafts and 
stationery products and its operations are consequently impacted by 
the sourcing and distribution chains associated with these products. 
Although the impacts of climate change do not currently pose a 
significant direct threat to the Group, several risks and opportunities 
have been identified that could influence the business. During FY24, 
we have assessed the impact of climate change on our strategy 
and financial planning, aiming to mitigate these risks and leverage 
potential opportunities. We remain committed to reducing the 
environmental impact of our operations.
Governance
In FY24, the Group continued to actively work to reduce its carbon 
footprint through the adoption of sustainable practices and utilisation 
of energy efficient solutions. Our governance policies promote 
transparency and accountability by incorporating climate change 
considerations into our strategy, increasing the resilience of the 
business. We continued to develop our governance structure to 
ensure there are Committees responsible for identifying, assessing 
and mitigating the impacts of climate change (see structure below). 
The Group is committed to building capacity internally and equipping 
our senior management with the appropriate knowledge to deliver 
on our objectives as a business. 
The Board has overall responsibility for climate change. Annually, 
the Board and Audit Committee review the Group’s risk register and 
the principal risks facing the Group. Environmental risk (including 
climate change) has been incorporated as a principal risk in the 
Group’s risk register since FY22. Members of the Operating Board 
presented the proposed Group risk register to the Audit Committee, 
which agreed to include it as a principal risk, as a result of the 
actual and potential financial costs associated and impact on 
the Group’s sales.
The sustainability team supports the Boards and the Audit 
Committee in developing and implementing strategy, managing 
climate-related issues, and assessing climate-related risks 
and opportunities.
plc Board
ESG Workstream Communities
Operating Board
ESG Communication Team
ESG Workstream Action Groups
Environment
Supply Chain
Colleagues
Communities
•	 Overall accountability and approval of overall strategy and commitments.
•	 Bi‑annual updates on progress.
•	 Decides on ESG spend and strategy.
•	 Provides oversight and support to the ESG focus groups.
•	 Monitors progress against targets, goals and risks in quarterly meetings.
•	 Ambassadors, Champions and Allies for Action Group activity and delivery.
•	 Provide broad input into ESG strategy, and identify emerging themes, needs and desires.
•	 Gain updates on progress from Action Groups and insight from experts (speaker 
slots/briefings).
•	 Meet as and when required dependent on objective.
•	 Communicates our efforts (required and desired) both internally and externally.
Each Action Group drives activity on workstream (including meeting cadence)
•	 Brings together expert and cross-business/functional experience.
•	 Facilitates and engages with workstream communities.
•	 Builds and delivers against an action plan and a budget.
•	 Sponsored by one or more Directors, has a Lead for each workstream who meet monthly.
•	 Reports to the Operating Board. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
30

Risk management
We have an established framework used by the Group for managing 
general risks, which incorporates processes to make decisions to 
manage or accept those risks, and to monitor steps taken to achieve 
risk mitigation. The management of climate‑related risks uses the 
same framework process. 
The processes for identifying and assessing 
climate‑related risks 
To support management in its identification and assessment of 
climate-related risks, we conducted a climate scenario analysis 
across all our operations in FY24 for the second time. A climate risk 
workshop was run by Inspired ESG in FY24. Taking into consideration 
the details of existing processes, and mitigation strategies across 
the business, the climate-related risks and opportunities identified 
were assessed and classified. In FY24, we took additional steps to 
understand and begin to quantify the impact of climate-related 
risks, where possible, for the Group’s financial planning. The most 
consequential climate-related risks and opportunities identified 
are detailed in the tables on pages 32 to 34; for each risk we have 
highlighted in which scenario there will be the greatest impact, 
and the measures we are implementing to increase our resilience. 
The priority of mitigation measures is determined from the likelihood 
and impact scores assigned, using low, medium or high. This process 
will be repeated annually. Items scoring ‘high’ will be the top priority. 
All material climate-related risks and opportunities identified through 
our scenario analysis are outlined in the tables on pages 32 to 34. 
Climate scenario analysis will be conducted annually to identify 
the transition and physical risks. Transition risks were identified 
at a Group level, and physical risks were identified on a site level 
across our Global operations.
The process for managing climate-related risks 
Through the internal stakeholder engagement process, we 
identified existing mitigation processes, which could be developed 
to mitigate the impact of climate change. The Operating Board 
is responsible for managing the Group’s climate-related risks and 
opportunities and is supported by the sustainability team. The 
sustainability team works closely with the members of the Operating 
Board and heads of department to ensure sustainability and 
climate change criteria are integrated into decision making 
when fulfilling their roles across the business. 
Integration of processes for identifying, assessing 
and managing climate-related risks into overall 
risk management 
Annually, a comprehensive operational risk review is conducted by 
the CFO identifying environmental (including climate change) risks, 
which are then integrated into the updated risk register. 
We have considered our existing risk process and structure of 
our risk register when creating a climate risk register, to ensure 
climate-related risks and opportunities are easily integrated into 
existing business functions, where appropriate. We mapped our 
existing business risks against those outlined by the CFD guidance 
to identify risk owners. 
The Board and Audit Committee review the Group’s principal 
risks, including climate change risk, twice per year. The CFO is 
responsible for the climate risk register to ensure climate-related 
risks and opportunities are reported annually. The climate risk 
register contains all transition and physical risks highlighted and 
informs the annual assessment of the environmental (including 
climate change) risk. 
Strategy
The climate-related risks and opportunities 
identified over the short, medium and long term 
In December 2023, we conducted a climate scenario analysis 
on 15 of our key sites, based on net turnover, to identify and 
assess the potential impact of physical risks and transition risks. 
The climate modelling considered the transition risks for The Works 
at a Group level. 
Our climate scenario analysis considered climate-related 
risks and opportunities under the three warming pathways that 
reflect differing severities of irreversible climatic shifts, leading to 
permanent new climate states that could be detrimental to society. 
Multiple scenarios were used to analyse how different variables 
can result in varying outcomes. The climate models used for this 
analysis include data from established third-party sources.
In performing the Group’s climate scenario analysis, the Group 
has considered the following additional factors, again in line with 
CFD guidance. This included different time horizons to understand 
whether risks are likely to occur in the short term (2023-2027), medium 
term (2028-2037) or long term (2038-2052) and the impacts of 
climate change extend beyond traditional business planning 
horizons. The medium-term scenario aligns with the Group’s Scope 1 
and Scope 2 net zero target. Since the UK has a net zero target 
for 2050, the long-term time horizon has been aligned with this 
timeframe. The impact of the climate-related risks was also 
considered across three warming pathways (page 32). 
Transition risks are those risks related to moving towards a 
decarbonised economy. These include potential issues with policy 
and legal, technology, market and reputational matters. Physical 
risks are due to climate events that may impact a business, such 
as flooding, rising mean temperatures and water stress, and are 
categorised as acute (occurring over a short period of time) or 
chronic (occurring over a long period of time).
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
31
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Scenario warming pathways
Between 2–3oC scenario 
(Reactive)
Organisations follow a co-ordinated 
and orderly transition to a low-carbon 
economy, aligning closely with the Paris 
Agreement and Science Based Targets 
initiative (SBTi), and therefore set net 
zero targets by 2050. Governments 
introduce policies in a structured 
manner, with companies investing 
in low-emission technology. 
The events in this scenario result from 
the commitments made at COP26. 
The response to climate change 
is delayed, with governments 
implementing policies and 
legislation in an unco-ordinated 
manner, leading to high transition 
risks in the medium term. Business 
continues as usual in the short term, 
whilst decarbonisation efforts remain 
in the high-emitting sectors.
Businesses continue as normal 
with limited climate action occurring, 
and emissions rise until 2040, resulting 
in a worst-case climate scenario. 
Governments are under pressure 
to take climate action, with policies 
introduced in a sporadic manner, and 
energy markets are highly volatile. 
Below 2oC scenario 
(Proactive)
Above 3oC scenario
(Inactive)
Strategy continued
The scenario warming pathways that were considered in the climate risk and opportunities analysis
Physical risks
Physical risks primarily materialise in a scenario where global temperatures surpass 3°C in the long term, where numerous climate tipping 
points would be reached due to the unchecked increase in carbon emissions. Physical risks could cause disruption to the business, for 
example, if employees and customers are unable to access the stores. Extreme weather can occur, especially during winter. As a substantial 
part of the Group’s profit is currently generated during the Christmas peak sales period, this can potentially impact the Group’s revenue. 
However, as the majority of stores are short leaseholds, we can change store locations if we are likely to be impacted by physical risks or 
have already been impacted. We will continually monitor physical risks by running an annual climate scenario analysis and expanding 
the scope of this to include further aspects of our supply chain in subsequent years of reporting.
The Group’s physical risks and mitigations for FY24
Category
Trend and highest impact 
Potential impact
Risk mitigation
Acute
Increased severity of flooding. 
Highest impact in the:
•	 Medium to long term
(2028–2052)
 >3°C scenario
Medium
Potential risk of store closure 
leading to decreased footfall 
and subsequent revenue loss.
Increased direct and indirect 
costs through flood damage and 
increases in insurance premiums 
as well as potential losses in 
revenue through store closures.
12 of 15 sampled sites are in 
potential high-flood-risk zones.
Flooding in the UK could damage 
buildings and assets, disrupt 
transport routes and result in 
increased insurance premiums. 
•	 Our disaster recovery plan 
ensures 48-hour tech service 
recovery, with remote work for 
all support departments.
•	 Contingencies are in 
place for data centre and 
e-commerce centre risks.
•	 The online fulfilment capability 
can also support some ongoing 
operations where sites 
are damaged.
•	 Flood equipment was 
installed within three weeks of 
one of our stores significantly 
flooding, with the subsequent 
establishment of comprehensive 
preventative measures.
Non-financial and sustainability information statement continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
32

Category
Trend and highest impact 
Potential impact
Risk mitigation
Acute continued
Heatwaves/extreme heat.
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to long term (2023–2052)
 
 2–3°C and >3°C scenarios
Low
Increased direct and indirect 
costs and decreased revenue.
All 15 assessed sites will experience 
heatwaves in the short to long 
term in the Reactive and 
Inactive scenarios.
Heatwaves may result in a greater 
demand for cooling, increasing 
Scope 2 emissions and energy costs.
Staff welfare may also be impacted.
•	 Energy saving initiatives will help 
to offset energy usage. 
•	 Air conditioning is being 
introduced, when appropriate.
•	 Employees follow a more relaxed 
dress code in heatwaves and 
are supplied with water.
•	 An emergency generator is 
installed at the Support Centre 
and head office to mitigate the 
impact of power cuts.
Chronic
Rising mean temperatures.
Highest impact in the:
•	 Long term (2028–2052)
 >3°C scenario
Low
Increased direct and indirect 
costs and decreased revenue.
All 15 assessed sites will experience 
heatwaves in the short to long 
term in the Reactive and 
Inactive scenarios.
•	 The risk owner will escalate 
impacts relating to rising 
temperatures and sign off on 
necessary mitigation measures.
Transition risks 
As the global economy begins to decarbonise, we anticipate that the potential impacts from transition risks will increase as governments 
and businesses make more efforts to reduce emissions. Our analysis suggests that the transition risks are most significant in the ‘Below 
2°C’ scenario and the ‘Between 2-3°C’ scenario, as there is more change entailed in adapting to increasingly aggressive policies and 
legislation implemented by governments and regulatory authorities. As we work to decarbonise our business to be net zero in relation to 
Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 emissions, this will mitigate the risk posed by emerging policy and legislation, such as carbon taxes and 
increases to greenhouse gas pricing. 
We have assessed the impact of climate-related risks and opportunities on our business, strategy and financial planning. Based on our 
FY24 assessment, our business is more likely to be impacted by transition risks. Currently identified and quantifiable transition costs have 
been incorporated into the Group’s financial plans. We also allocated internal resources and engaged with a third-party ESG specialist 
to ensure compliance with climate regulations.
The Group’s transition risks and mitigations for FY24
Category
Trend and highest impact 
Potential impact
Risk mitigation
Policy and legal
Increase in climate change 
regulation, including increased 
emissions reporting obligations.
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to medium term 
(2023–2037)
 
 <2°C and 2–3°C scenarios
Low
Expenditures – Increased direct 
costs, for example increased 
EPR and WEEE (battery waste 
fees) costs. 
Potential risk: We have already 
seen increases in emissions 
reporting regulation through 
SECR, ESOS, TCFD and Extended 
Producer Responsibility (EPR), with 
further regulation likely to emerge.
•	 Senior management is made 
aware of key compliance 
requirements within its business 
units and consults with the CFO 
and external advisers to identify 
and manage issues.
Mandates on and regulation of 
existing products and services. 
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to medium term 
(2023–2037)
 
 <2°C and 2–3°C scenarios
Low
Expenditures – Increased direct 
and indirect costs. 
Potential risk: We and/or our 
suppliers may be subject to 
increased regulations regarding 
plastics and packaging, e.g. the 
UK plastic tax, which are likely to 
intensify over time. 
•	 In FY24 we formed an internal 
working group to support in 
achieving our waste and 
packaging reduction targets. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
33
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Category
Trend and highest impact 
Potential impact
Risk mitigation
Policy and legal 
continued
Increase in carbon/GHG pricing. 
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to medium term 
(2023–2037)
 2–3°C scenarios
Medium
Expenditures — Increased direct 
costs and compliance spending.
Potential risk: The UK has 
committed to a series of five-year 
carbon budgets. If carbon 
emissions do not decrease enough 
to meet targets, a tax on carbon 
emissions may be introduced. 
•	 We are not currently subject to 
carbon pricing and the Group 
has committed to becoming net 
zero for Scope 2 by 2030 and 
Scope 1 by 2035, decreasing the 
potential impact of this risk. 
Exposure to litigation. 
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to medium term 
(2023–2037)
 
 <2°C and 2–3°C scenarios
Low
Expenditures — Increased direct 
costs and direct costs associated 
with compliance.
Potential risk: Legal standards and 
reporting requirements may become 
more onerous in the short to medium 
term. This could increase the risk 
of lawsuits, compliance issues and 
fines. Any litigation could negatively 
impact our brand and reputation.
•	 The Group’s CFO and Company 
Secretary oversee regulatory 
compliance with support from 
external advisers. 
•	 Third-party ESG specialist 
supports the Group to remain 
aware of emerging regulations.
Technology
Costs to transition to lower-
emissions technology.
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to medium term 
(2023–2037)
 
 <2°C and 2–3°C scenarios
Medium
Expenditures — Increased 
capital expenditures.
Actual risk: To reduce our Scope 1 
and Scope 2 carbon emissions 
and meet our net zero targets for 
Scope 2 by 2030 and Scope 1 
by 2035, we will need to invest 
in lower-emission technology. 
This will have an initial cost for 
the business. 
•	 Budget allocation towards 
low-emission technology, such as 
LED lighting, has been authorised.
•	 The payback associated with 
investment into energy 
efficiency technology can 
mitigate upfront costs.
•	 Annual spend on low-emission 
technology will be informed by 
the net zero Scope 2 roadmap, 
developed from the findings of 
our ESOS surveys. 
Products and 
services
Development of new products. 
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to medium term
(2023–2037)
Medium
Revenues — Increased revenue 
from an increased demand for 
sustainable products and services. 
Customer preferences are likely to 
favour more sustainable products. 
The Group continues to offer 
sustainable products.
•	 Procure sustainable products and 
packaging that contribute to the 
journey to net zero. Please see 
page 28 for further information.
Energy resources
Use of lower-emission sources 
of energy.
Highest impact in the:
•	 Short to medium term
(2023–2037)
Medium
Expenditures — Reduction 
in operating expenses from 
increased efficiency (for example, 
decreased energy costs). 
The introduction of lower-emission 
energy sources across the Group’s 
estate would contribute to reduced 
energy consumption, emissions and 
associated costs over time. 
On-site energy generation would 
reduce annual operation spending.
•	 Conduct energy site surveys 
to identify energy saving 
opportunities. The findings of 
the ESOS surveys will inform the 
net zero roadmap for Scope 2.
•	 Influence colleague behaviour 
in our stores towards energy 
saving by the end of FY25.
•	 Engaged with our landlords 
to discuss energy efficiency 
improvements, such as where 
solar panels would be feasible.
•	 All new, refitted and relocated 
stores have and will continue to 
be fitted with Priority Intelligence 
Requirements (PIRs).
Non-financial and sustainability information statement continued
Strategy continued
Transition risks continued
The Group’s transition risks and mitigations for FY24 continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
34

Metrics and targets 
We use a range of metrics to assess and manage our 
climate‑related risks and opportunities, including greenhouse gas 
emissions (see pages 35 to 37) and energy consumption (page 36). 
We have considered cross-industry metrics, including transition and 
physical risks, climate-related opportunities, capital deployment 
and executive remuneration, when reviewing the impact of climate 
change on our business. 
We have set an absolute net zero target for Scope 1 by 2035, Scope 2 
by 2030, and Scope 3 by 2045 (with an ambition to achieve Scope 3 
by 2040). We aspire to achieve our net zero targets through a 90% 
reduction in our emissions and offset the remaining 10%. We are in 
the process of developing our transition plan and setting near-term 
targets. Our targets have been established using a location-based 
methodology, and our FY22 carbon emissions performance is the 
baseline against which we will measure our absolute reductions. 
Our Scope 1 and 2 net zero target differs from our Scope 3 target, 
as we have more control over our Scope 1 and 2 emissions, so it is 
easier to reduce these emissions.
We have been calculating our Scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions 
in line with the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) 
framework since 2019 (page 36). This year we calculated our Scope 
3 carbon emissions for the second time. To establish a baseline for 
reporting we have used FY22 financial data to estimate our prior 
year Scope 3 emissions. 12 of the 15 Scope 3 categories apply to 
the Group. The excluded categories are Category 10 (Processing of 
Sold Products), Category 14 (Franchises) and Category 15 (Investments). 
These categories are not applicable because the Group does not 
sell products that require further processing (Category 10), does not 
have franchise locations (Category 14), and does not engage in 
financial investments (Category 15). 
The Group’s FY24 carbon balance sheet for the UK and Ireland
Greenhouse gas emissions inventory
Emissions scope and category
FY24
tCO2e
Percentage of
total emissions
Scope 1 
442
0.5%
Scope 2 (location-based)
2,798
3.1%
Scope 3 
86,753
96.4%
Total emissions (location-based)
89,993
100%
Targets
Our Scope 1 and 2 targets, with our Scope 3 ambition, align with the British Retail Consortium’s (BRC) climate action roadmap. We aspire 
to achieve our net zero targets through a 90% reduction in our emissions and offset the remaining 10%. We aim to make annual progress 
to reach our targets (page 37).
Net zero Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions and the associated targets
Target
FY24 emissions
(tCO2e)
FY22 (baseline) 
emissions (tCO2e)
Progress to meet target
Net zero Scope 1 emissions 
by 2035
442 tCO2e
219 tCO2e
Scope 1 emissions have increased by 101.8% from our FY22 
baseline. We need to reduce our emissions by 38 tonnes (on 
average) per annum to meet our 2035 net zero target. Scope 1 
transport emissions increased due to a large increase in 
company car mileage compared to the baseline.
Net zero Scope 2 emissions 
by 2030
2,798 tCO2e
2,869 tCO2e
Scope 2 emissions have decreased by 2.5% from the FY22 baseline. 
This is behind the average annual reduction required of 11.3%. 
From FY24, an average annual reduction of 15.0% is required.
Net zero Scope 3 emissions 
by 2045
89,753 tCO2e
95,923 tCO2e
Scope 3 emissions have decreased by 6.4% from our FY22 
baseline, ahead of the required 3.9% average annual reduction. 
Energy efficiency improvements 
The Group is committed to year-on-year improvements in its 
operational energy efficiency. A register of energy efficiency 
measures has been compiled, with a view to implementing these 
measures in the next five years. In FY24, we implemented several 
energy efficiency measures to reduce our overall energy consumption, 
including the continued rollout of LED lighting across the operational 
estate and the commencement of the Energy Savings Opportunity 
Scheme (ESOS) to identify energy efficiency opportunities.
We are planning further efficiency improvements in FY25 including: 
developing an energy efficiency behaviour change programme for 
colleagues across stores, Distribution Centre and Support Centre; 
engaging with landlords to identify and implement energy efficiency 
opportunities across the store estate; and continuing the rollout 
of LED lighting. 
Reporting methodology 
This report (including the Scope 1, 2 and 3 consumption and CO2e 
emissions data) has been developed and calculated using the 
GHG Protocol – A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard 
(World Resources Institute and World Business Council for Sustainable 
Development, 2004); Greenhouse Gas Protocol – Scope 2 Guidance 
(World Resources Institute, 2015); ISO 14064-1 and ISO 14064-2 
(ISO, 2018; ISO, 2019); and Environmental Reporting Guidelines: 
Including Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting Guidance 
(HM Government, 2019). 
Government Emissions Factor Database 2023 version 1.1 has 
been used, utilising the published kWh gross calorific value (CV) 
and kgCO2e emissions factors relevant for the reporting period 
1 May 2023 to 30 April 2024.
Estimations were undertaken to cover missing billing periods for 
properties directly invoiced to the Group. These were calculated 
on a kWh/day pro-rata basis at the meter level.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
35
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Metrics and targets continued
Reporting methodology continued
For properties where the Group is indirectly responsible 
for utilities (i.e. via a landlord or service charge) or no data is 
available for the meter, an average kWh/m2 consumption was 
applied to the properties with similar operations with no available 
data. The average kWh/m2 was taken from the CIBSE Energy 
Benchmarking Dashboard, which provides regional and national 
averages for comparable buildings in various sectors. In this case, 
the average for the Retail sector – Catalogue Stores was used 
to estimate consumption. 
These full-year estimations were applied to 73 electricity supplies. 
All estimations equated to 13.76% of reported consumption. 
Market-based calculations have been included for the first time 
in FY23; therefore, no year-on-year comparisons are available. 
Market-based emissions have been calculated using a residual 
grid factor.
The 2023 Irish average grid factor has been used for relevant 
Irish sites for the reporting period of 1 May 2023 to 30 April 2024.
Intensity metrics have been calculated using total tCO2e figures, 
and the selected performance indicators for the relevant 
reporting period:
Non-financial and sustainability information statement continued
Total Group reportable energy supplies consumption (kWh) for FY24 and FY23
FY24
FY231
Utility and scope
UK
Global
(excluding UK)
Total
UK
Global
(excluding UK)
Total
Scope 1 total
1,972,404
—
1,972,404
883,410
—
883,410
Natural gas (Scope 1)
174,106
—
174,106
155,792
—
155,792
Transport (Scope 1)
1,798,298
—
1,798,298
727,618
—
727,618
Scope 2 total
13,139,408
289,637
13,429,045
12,855,807
184,328
13,040,135
Grid-supplied electricity (Scope 2)
13,139,408
289,637
13,429,045
12,855,807
184,328
13,040,135
Scope 3 total
283,004
—
283,004
92,674
—
92,674
Transport (Scope 3)
283,004
—
283,004
92,674
—
92,674
Total
15,394,816
289,637
15,684,453
13,831,891
184,328
14,016,219
1	 FY23 kWh data has been restated to align methodology with the FY24 data.
Group emissions (tCO2e) Scope 1, 2 and 3 (transport) for FY24 and FY23
FY24
FY231
Utility and scope
UK
Global
(excluding UK)
Total
UK
Global
(excluding UK)
Total
Scope 1 total
442.04
—
442.04
197.67
—
197.67
Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1)
31.85
—
31.85
28.44
—
28.44
Transport (Scope 1)
410.19
—
410.19
169.23
—
169.23
Scope 2 total
2,720.83
76.95
2,797.78
2,536.49
60.90
2,597.39
Grid-supplied electricity (Scope 2)
2,720.83
76.95
2,797.78
2,536.49
60.90
2,597.39
Scope 3 total
63.65
—
63.65
21.46
—
21.46
Transport (Scope 3)
63.65
—
63.65
21.46
—
21.46
Total
3,226.52
76.95
3,303.47
2,755.62
60.90
2,816.52
1	 FY23 kWh data has been restated to align methodology with the FY24 data.
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR)
In accordance with the SECR requirements, the information 
below summarises our energy usage, associated emissions, 
energy efficiency actions (page 35) and energy performance. 
The disclosure covers all our operations, including our operations 
in the Republic of Ireland. Scope 1 consumption and emissions 
include direct combustion of natural gas and fuels utilised for 
transportation operations, for example, company vehicle fleets. 
Scope 2 consumption and emissions refer to indirect emissions 
related to the consumption of purchased electricity in day-to-day 
business operations. Scope 3 consumption and emissions cover 
emissions resulting from sources not directly owned by the 
Group. This relates to grey fleet (business travel undertaken 
in employee‑owned vehicles) only. 
Total revenue (£m) (UK and ROI sites)
£282.6m
(FY23: £280.1m)
Total revenue (£m) (ROI sites)
£4.8m
(FY23: £4.8m)
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
36

Group intensity metric
An intensity metric of tCO2e per £m revenue has been applied to our annual total emissions and is detailed in the table below.
Group intensity metric of tCO2e per £m revenue for FY24, FY23 and FY22
Intensity metric
FY24
FY23 1
FY22
Percentage
change 
between FY22
and FY24
tCO2e/£m revenue
11.69
19.26
11.75
(0.51%)
1	 FY23 kWh data has been restated to align methodology with the FY24 data.
Reducing our emissions
Reducing our emissions is a key focus for managing our climate-related risks, as it impacts our operations. By understanding our emissions, 
we are better equipped to set realistic targets and identify areas for reduction.
The Group’s progress in reducing Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions against our FY22 baseline
Greenhouse gas emissions inventory
Emissions scope and category
FY24
tCO2e
FY23 1
tCO2e
FY22 1
tCO2e
(baseline)
Percentage
change from
FY24 compared
to baseline (FY22)
Scope 1 
442
198
219
101.8
Scope 2 (location-based)
2,798
2,597 
2,869
(2.5)
Scope 3 
86,753
94,991
84,657
2.5
Total emissions (location-based)
89,993
97,786
87,745
2.6
1	 FY22 and FY23 kWh data has been restated to align methodology with the FY24 data.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
37
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties
Our risk management framework
The Board is responsible for ensuring that appropriate risk 
management processes and controls are in place. The Board has 
delegated responsibility for overseeing risk management processes 
and controls to the Audit Committee. Day-to-day risk management 
is the responsibility of the senior management team. Further details 
of the governance structure are set out in the Corporate governance 
report on page 50. 
Risks are identified and assessed using a bottom-up review 
process. Senior management determines the potential risks that 
could affect its areas of responsibility and the likelihood and impact. 
This information is used to create the Group’s primary risk register 
and capture principal risks which are subsequently considered by 
the Audit Committee and the Board. 
Risk appetite
The Board determines the Group’s risk appetite. Where a conflict 
exists between risk management and strategic ambitions, the 
Board seeks to achieve a balance which facilitates the long-term 
success of the Group.
Principal and emerging risks and changes in 
principal risks
The Board conducts a robust assessment of the principal risks 
facing the Group and emerging risks, including those that could 
threaten the operation of its business, future performance or 
solvency. The Board formally reviews the Group’s principal risks 
at least twice a year. 
A detailed operational risk review was undertaken by the Head 
of Finance during December 2023. This review included discussions 
with members of the Operating Board covering current, principal 
and emerging risks affecting their respective areas of responsibility 
and broader corporate risks. Following this review, the Group’s 
primary risk register and its principal risks and mitigation plans were 
updated, and considered by the Audit Committee and the Board 
in January 2024, April 2024 and September 2024. 
In December 2023, members of the Operating Board attended 
climate risk management workshops facilitated by Inspired Energy, 
the Group’s external energy consultancy, where an overview of 
identified climate risks and opportunities was presented, and the 
impact and likelihood of each risk were initially assessed. The 
findings from the workshop informed the assessment of risks and 
opportunities performed for FY24. Further information in relation 
to the Group’s climate risks is included on pages 32 to 34. 
The principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group as at the 
date of this Annual Report are set out in order of priority on pages 38 
to 43, together with details of how these are currently mitigated. 
The adjacent heatmap illustrates the Board’s assessment of the 
likelihood of the principal risks occurring and the resulting impact, 
after taking into account mitigating actions.
During the period the main changes to the principal risks were 
as follows:
•	 The overall level of risk for ‘Economy and market’ was raised from 
‘high’ to ‘very high’ given the macro economic environment.
•	 	The overall level of risk for the ‘Design and execution of strategy’ 
risk was lowered from ‘very high’ to ‘high’ following the 
implementation of a series of additional mitigations including 
the appointment of a new Chief Commercial Officer bringing a 
revised approach to buying which began improving our proposition 
and started to drive gross product margins higher in the latter 
part of FY24. 
In FY23 an emerging geopolitical risk was identified regarding the 
Group’s ability to source stock if economic sanctions were imposed 
on China. Whilst we currently continue to assess the probability of 
this risk crystallising as very low we have broadened our geopolitical 
risk to consider the risk of disruption caused by the ongoing war in 
Ukraine as well as disruption in the Red Sea (which is also considered 
as part of our supply chain risk), and the potential impact the latter 
in particular has on lead times and freight rates. This emerging risk 
will be maintained on our secondary risk register and we will 
continue to monitor it. 
The Group may be exposed to other risks and uncertainties not 
presently known to management, or currently deemed less material, 
that may subsequently have an adverse effect on the business. 
Further, the exposure to each risk will evolve as mitigating actions 
are taken or as new risks emerge or the nature of risks changes.
Effective risk management helps us 
identify, evaluate and manage the 
risks which could impact the business
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
38

Risk heatmap
Principal and emerging risks and changes in principal risks
Low
Likelihood
High
Low
Impact
High
3
1
2
4
7
6
5
8
9
11
10
Principal risks
1.	 Economy and market
2.	 Design and execution of strategy
3.	 Supply chain 
4.	 IT systems and cyber security 
5.	 Brand and reputation 
6.	 Seasonality of sales 
7.	 People 
8.	 Environment
9.	 Regulation and compliance 
10.	Liquidity 
11.	 Business continuity and IT 
Change from prior year
	
Increased
	
Decreased
	 Unchanged
1. Economy and market
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
A deterioration in economic conditions or a 
reduction in consumer confidence could impact 
customer spending and reduce the Group’s revenue 
and profitability.
Change from prior year
Increased level of risk given the macro economic 
environment.
Link to strategy
 
 
 
Mitigations
•	 Take account of expected impact in the strategic planning process, 
budgets and forecasts. FY25 budget prepared on the assumption of 
a benign consumer environment, with a focus on improving margins 
and cost control. 
•	 Control costs while making carefully considered investments in certain 
areas to support growth.
•	 Increased direct sourcing and product engineering and reduced 
markdowns and improved negotiations with suppliers, to improve gross 
margin. 
•	 Operate stores on flexible short-term leases to benefit from reductions 
in rents through the rolling renegotiation of leases. 
•	 Store estate can be adapted relatively quickly in the event of material 
local changes in demand.
•	 Developed contingency plans should trade deteriorate as part of our 
reasonable worst-case scenario planning produced for the AIM Working 
Capital Report. 
Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement
Enhance our 
online proposition
Optimise our 
store estate
Drive operational 
improvements
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
39
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

2. Design and execution of strategy 
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
The Group generates its revenue from the sale of 
books, toys and games, arts and crafts and stationery.
Although it has a track record of understanding 
customers’ needs for these products, the market is 
competitive. Customers’ tastes and shopping habits 
can change quickly. Failure to effectively predict or 
respond to changes could affect the Group’s sales 
and financial performance.
Failure to effectively execute the ‘better, not just 
bigger’ strategy (e.g. due to insufficient capacity 
or inadequate capability) would have an adverse 
impact on the Group’s ability to grow, particularly 
if the envisaged sales growth drivers fail to increase 
sales. Furthermore, achieving increased sales growth 
could be more challenging if consumer confidence 
is impacted by deteriorating economic conditions.
Change from prior year
Reduced level of risk from prior year following the 
implementation of a series of additional mitigations 
including the appointment of a new Chief 
Commercial Officer. 
Link to strategy
 
 
 
Mitigations
•	 Increased strategic focus on developing the brand and increasing 
customer engagement to further differentiate the Group from competitors.
•	 Emerging trends monitored by a recently strengthened trading team that 
has a track record of responding to changing consumer tastes.
•	 Monitor competitors’ propositions and discuss key developments at weekly 
trading meetings and at Board level on a regular basis.
•	 Monitor and review customer feedback.
•	 Use sales data and online feedback channels to inform purchasing 
and marketing decisions.
•	 Flexible lease terms allow the Group to adapt its store portfolio (which 
continues to be highly relevant to customers) to suit evolving 
shopping habits.
•	 Ongoing investment in the Group’s online capability ensures 
complementary digital and store propositions, as customers increasingly 
engage with both channels.
•	 The appointment of a new Chief Commercial Officer in September 2023 
was key to the more significant progress we are now making on clarifying 
and improving our proposition (including our pricing and commercial 
proposition) and driving gross margins higher.
•	 Our big five areas of focus for FY25 have been agreed, with clear plans 
being developed for each, taking into account capacity, capability and 
the external trading environment.
3. Supply chain
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
The Group uses third parties, including many in Asia, 
for the supply of products. Risks include the potential 
for supplier failures, risks associated with manufacturing 
and importing goods from overseas, potential disruption 
at various stages of the supply chain and suppliers 
failing to act or operate ethically.
Supply chain disruption due to shipping issues such 
as those currently being experienced in the Red Sea 
could cause disruption to stock availability and 
cost inflation. 
Failure to execute the restructuring of the supply 
chain team successfully to implement necessary 
changes to the stock process could prevent the right 
stock getting to the right stores at the right time 
and materially impact sales growth.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
 
Mitigations
•	 Buying and supply chain teams strengthened through FY24, with robust 
ways of working and accountabilities to be embedded in FY25.
•	 Strengthened the quality assurance team with a Head of Quality 
Assurance, Sourcing & Sustainability recruited and an experienced team 
which will man-mark each pillar with a focus to embed quality management 
processes to maintain an appropriate level of supplier and product quality, 
including upfront product assessment at development stage, product 
testing, pre-shipment inspections and assessment of customer reviews.
•	 Onboarded new ethical compliance partner, Verisio, with on the ground 
expertise, to launch and support new ways of working to understand our tier 
one factory base and audit status relating to social and ethical requirements.
•	 Updated supplier Code of Conduct and will share with supplier base in line 
with new ethical compliance launch.
•	 As new processes and ways of working are embedded we will update 
supplier T&Cs and our policies that reinforce the Group’s values and its 
commitment to conduct business fairly, ethically and with respect to 
human rights which suppliers are required to adhere to. 
•	 Recruiting a Sourcing Manager to support supplier base review through 
FY25 to manage risk across own brand and branded, ensure that we have 
flexibility across product groups and reduce reliance on individual suppliers. 
•	 Proactive management of supply chain to ensure stock levels 
are appropriate. 
•	 Continue to review freight costs (including measures to mitigate them) 
and monitor alternative sourcing arrangements where practicable. 
Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties continued
Principal and emerging risks and changes in principal risks continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
40

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement
Enhance our 
online proposition
Optimise our 
store estate
Drive operational 
improvements
4. IT systems and cyber security
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
The Group relies on key IT systems. Failure to develop, 
secure and maintain these, or any prolonged system 
performance problems or lack of service, could affect 
the Group’s ability to trade and/or could lead to 
significant fines and reputational damage. 
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
 
Mitigations
•	 The actions taken in response to the cyber security incident in March 2022 
have significantly reduced the risk of the business suffering major loss or 
disruption in the event of subsequent attacks.
•	 Reliable systems and data integrity are key to the execution of the 
strategy. Ensuring systems and processes are fit for purpose will enable the 
delivery of improvements to the proposition.
•	 Modern two-factor authentication for access, combined with up-to-date 
end point detection capabilities (to monitor devices and assess unexpected/
risky activity) and network segmentation, lowers the probability of malicious 
entry and speed of movement of malware across the business.
•	 24/7/365 Security Operations Centre, established in FY23, monitors and 
responds to any unusual activities in systems or networks.
•	 Enhanced working from home capabilities established in response to the 
pandemic have reduced the level of dependence on a single site head office.
•	 Regular IT investment strategy review undertaken by the Operating Board 
including security and infrastructure investment programmes.
•	 In-house IT capabilities further strengthened in FY23 and FY24 with 
increased capability for detective, diagnostic and defence measures.
•	 Further work now being planned to upgrade out of support hardware 
to further mitigate the impact of an event should it arise.
5. Brand and reputation
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
The Group’s brand is vital to its success. Failure to 
protect the brand, in particular in relation to product 
quality and safety, could result in the Group’s 
reputation, sales and future prospects being 
adversely affected.
Diversity and inclusion issues have become more 
prominent in customer preferences; failure to stock 
a diverse range of products and ensure inclusivity 
could create reputational damage.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
Mitigations
•	 Communicate to colleagues our clarified purpose and values.
•	 Provide intellectual property guidance and education to design 
and sourcing teams.
•	 Monitor customer product reviews, take appropriate action to remove 
products from sale and take other actions as appropriate where quality 
issues are identified.
•	 In-house product quality assurance team works with suppliers to 
ensure product quality, safety and ethical production, embedding quality 
management processes to maintain an appropriate level of supplier and 
product quality, including upfront product assessment at development 
stage, product testing, pre-shipment inspections and assessment of 
customer reviews.
•	 Onboarded new ethical compliance partner to launch and support new 
ways of working to understand our tier one factory base and audit status 
relating to social and ethical requirements.
•	 Monitor the Group’s ESG responsibilities and implement appropriate 
processes to ensure the Group operates in a responsible way.
•	 Diversity and Inclusion Committee to educate the business.
•	 Social listening to monitor customer feedback and monitor potential brand 
damaging issues.
•	 Operating in a responsible way, including health and safety compliance 
in stores.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
41
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

6. Seasonality of sales
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
The Group generally makes substantially all of its 
profit in the second half of the financial year during 
the peak Christmas trading period. Interruptions to 
supply, adverse weather, a significant downturn in 
consumer confidence or a failure to successfully 
execute strategy in this period could have a 
significant impact on the short-term profitability 
of the Group.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
 
Mitigations
•	 Continue to develop the year-round appeal of the proposition, for 
example, by becoming more focused on everyday customer shopping 
missions/micro-seasons and targeting our marketing campaigns towards 
these and trialling new ranges to appeal all year round (e.g. cards 
and wrap range).
•	 Hold weekly trading meetings to ensure that immediate action is taken 
to maximise sales based on current and expected trading conditions.
•	 Plan rigorously for product proposition, supply chain and retail operations 
to ensure the success of the peak Christmas trading period. 
7. People
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
The Group’s success is strongly influenced by 
the quality of the Board, senior management team 
and colleagues generally. A lack of effective 
succession planning and development of key 
colleagues could harm future prospects.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
 
 
Mitigations
•	 Discuss and review succession plans at Nomination Committee meetings.
•	 Establish development programmes to support future leaders. 
•	 Operate the Can Do Academy to facilitate training and development.
•	 Employee communication and engagement platform, MyWorks.
•	 Well-managed search and recruitment processes, together with appealing 
proposition and welcoming culture, enable recruitment of high-calibre 
executives, evidenced through successful recruitment of the 
merchandising team and other key heads of department.
•	 Implement a Remuneration Policy designed to ensure management 
incentives support the Group’s long-term success for the benefit of all 
stakeholders, including a Long-Term Incentive Plan for Executive Directors 
and Operating Board members.
•	 Initiated an ‘Employee Value Proposition’ project.
8. Environment
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
There is an increased focus on sustainable business 
from consumers and regulators. In our business this 
applies to products and packaging in particular. 
Failure to respond to these demands could affect the 
Group’s reputation, sales and financial performance.
Supply chain disruptions due to more extreme 
weather events created as a result of global warming 
could damage operations, in particular the flow of 
stock which could adversely impact sales.
There are increased reporting and disclosure 
requirements relating to climate change and 
environmental impact including new taxes, regulation 
and compliance risks as noted in the ‘Regulation 
and compliance’ risk below.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
Mitigations
•	 Operating Board and plc meetings completed quarterly including 
discussion of ESG matters.
•	 Implementing initiatives to reduce our impact on the environment.
•	 Retain specialist third-party ESG consultancy advisers to assist in the 
further development of the Group’s environmental strategy and ensure 
compliance with CFD requirements.
•	 Sustainability manager to lead the development and implementation 
of our environmental strategy.
•	 Working with third-party logistics providers to explore and invest in energy 
efficient solutions within the supply chain.
•	 Developed a climate risk register.
•	 Set net zero targets and building roadmaps to achieve these.
•	 Measured our carbon footprint using carbon balance sheet approach 
and now have comparative data.
Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties continued
Principal and emerging risks and changes in principal risks continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
42

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement
Enhance our 
online proposition
Optimise our 
store estate
Drive operational 
improvements
9. Regulation and compliance
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
The Group is exposed to an increasing number of 
legal and regulatory compliance requirements 
including the Bribery Act, the Modern Slavery Act, the 
General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and the 
AIM Rules for Companies. Failure to comply with these 
laws and regulations could lead to financial claims, 
penalties, awards of damages, fines or reputational 
damage which could significantly impact the 
financial performance of the business.
There are extensive and increasingly onerous laws 
and regulations (including reporting and disclosure 
requirements) surrounding climate change and 
environmental reporting. Failure to comply with these 
could result in financial penalties, legal consequences 
and/or reputational damage.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
Mitigations
•	 Oversight of regulatory compliance by CFO, Company Secretary and 
Nominated Adviser (Singer Capital Markets) with support from other 
external advisers.
•	 Implement policies and procedures in relation to both mandatory 
requirements and measures the Group has adopted voluntarily 
(e.g. anti-bribery and corruption and adherence to National Living 
Wage requirements).
•	 Operate a whistleblowing policy and procedure which enable colleagues 
to confidentially report any concerns or inappropriate behaviour.
•	 Operate a GDPR policy which is overseen by a suitably experienced data 
supervisor and monitored by members of a GDPR governance monitoring group 
who meet regularly and report key issues to the senior management team.
•	 Retain experienced advisers where necessary to cover gaps in expertise 
in the in-house team.
•	 The Group maintains an anti-bribery and corruption policy statement that 
reinforces that the Group is committed to absolute integrity and fairness 
across its operation and accordingly will not tolerate any activities involving 
bribery or corruption. It is the Group’s policy to prohibit all forms of corruption 
amongst its colleagues, its suppliers and any associated parties acting on 
its behalf. The Group maintains written records of all gifts and hospitality 
received. The policy is applicable to all colleagues, contractors, consultants, 
officers, interims and casual and agency workers and is regularly 
communicated to ensure adherence.
10. Liquidity
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
Insufficient liquidity available and/or insufficient 
headroom in banking facilities. Potential for breach 
of banking covenants if financial performance is 
significantly worse than forecast.
Availability of credit insurance to suppliers may 
be reduced or removed resulting in an increased 
cash requirement.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
 
 
Mitigations
•	 Financial forecasts and covenant headroom monitored and reported 
to the Board and the bank monthly.
•	 Strategy focuses on driving like-for-like sales and improving efficiency, rather 
than previous store rollout plan, which is a less capital intensive strategy.
•	 The Group’s bank facility at year end FY23 comprised a committed RCF 
of £30.0m with an expiry date of 30 November 2025. Since then, the Group 
has implemented a reduction in the size of the facility, which was undrawn 
throughout most of FY23, to £20.0m, and simultaneously extended its term 
such that it now expires on 30 November 2026. At 5 May 2024 the facility 
was undrawn.
•	 Careful management of banking relationship increases the likelihood 
of a supportive response in the event that it should be needed. This was 
demonstrated during the AIM listing process where the Group was able to 
negotiate a favourable change to its fixed charge covenant (falling from 1.2 
to 1.05, subject to the completion of, and effective as at, admission to AIM).
11. Business continuity and IT
Risk, profile change and link to strategy
Significant disruption to the operation, in particular 
internal IT systems, Support Centre or Distribution 
Centre, could severely impact the Group’s ability to 
supply stores or fulfil online sales resulting in financial 
or reputational damage.
Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.
Link to strategy
 
 
 
Mitigations
•	 IT recovery plans fully tested in the response to the March 2022 cyber 
security incident.
•	 Implemented new cloud backups with new recovery services for central 
servers to a third-party data centre with a 48-hour recovery target.
•	 Tested recovery from new cloud backup in FY24.
•	 Revamped the business continuity plan in FY24.
•	 Emergency generator is maintained at the Group’s Support Centre 
to insulate the business from the impact of power cuts.
•	 Mitigating actions being developed around the DC disruption risk.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
43
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Board of Directors
An experienced team
Date of appointment
July 2024
Committee membership
Chair of the Nomination Committee 
and member of the Remuneration 
and Audit Committees.
Relevant skills and experience
•	 Extensive experience as both Chair 
and Non‑Executive Director, having 
worked in and advised a wide range 
of public and private companies 
and as Chairman of, and adviser 
to, investment committees and 
capital providers.
•	 Record of supporting leadership 
teams to execute their operational 
strategies and in creating 
shareholder value.
•	 Former Chief Operating Officer 
and Finance Director of Sherwood 
International plc.
Current external appointments
Senior Independent Director and Chair 
of the Audit Committee at Caffyns plc 
and independent Non-Executive Director 
and Chair of the Audit Committee at 
Empresaria Group plc. 
Date of appointment
January 2020
Committee membership
None.
Relevant skills and experience
•	 Significant financial, retail and 
commercial expertise, including as 
Chief Financial Officer of The Works, 
and, prior to that, as Commercial Director 
at Card Factory plc where he was 
responsible for the commercial function 
(buying, space and merchandising) and 
leadership of the commercial finance 
team. He played a key role in the 
successful IPO of Card Factory in 2014 
and its subsequent growth and evolution 
as a listed business.
•	 Chartered Accountant, having started 
his career at PwC where he spent 
eight years working in the audit and 
corporate finance departments.
•	 Joined The Works as Chief Financial 
Officer in April 2018, overseeing the 
IPO and serving as an Executive 
Director of TheWorks.co.uk plc since 
the IPO in July 2018.
Current external appointments
None.
Date of appointment
January 2024
Committee membership
None.
Relevant skills and experience
•	 Significant commercial and financial 
experience in PLCs. Previously worked 
at Spirit Pub Company and National Grid, 
holding senior roles with responsibility 
for defining and directing financial and 
commercial reporting, business planning 
and financial control and risk.
•	 Chartered Accountant, having started 
her career at PwC where she spent 
five years working in the audit and 
tax departments.
•	 Joined The Works in March 2019. 
Worked as both Head of Finance 
and Interim Chief Financial Officer 
before being promoted to Chief 
Financial Officer and joining the 
Board on 1 January 2024. 
Current external appointments
None.
Steve Bellamy 
Chair and 
Non-Executive Director
A  N  R
Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
Rosie Fordham
Chief Financial Officer
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
44

Date of appointment
July 2018
Committee membership
Chair of the Audit Committee 
and member of the Nomination 
and Remuneration Committees.
Relevant skills and experience
•	 Extensive retail and consumer 
experience, including as co-founder 
of Tragus Holdings Ltd, owner of 
Café Rouge and Bella Italia restaurant 
chains and a Non-Executive Director 
of Bibendum Wine Holdings Ltd.
•	 Significant financial and commercial 
expertise as Chief Financial Officer of 
Tragus Holdings Ltd and Chief Executive 
Officer of Armajaro Asset Management 
LLP. He also held senior management 
roles at P&O.
•	 Chartered Accountant.
Current external appointments
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Audit Committee at JD Wetherspoon plc, 
a Trustee of the Ascot Authority and 
a Non-Executive Director of Schroder 
UK Mid Cap Fund plc. Director of 
Cadogan Group Limited and two 
related subsidiary companies. 
Date of appointment
July 2018
Committee membership
Chair of the Remuneration Committee 
and member of the Audit and 
Nomination Committees.
Relevant skills and experience
•	 Significant retail experience as Group 
HR Director of Genus plc, having 
previously held the same role at Tesco plc 
where she led retail management 
development and customer service 
training during a period of significant 
expansion in the UK and overseas. Prior 
to this she held positions at Somerfield 
and Boots.
•	 Extensive people and reward expertise 
having developed reward structures that 
align leadership motivation with strategy 
at both Genus plc and Tesco plc.
Current external appointments
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee at Renishaw plc.
Harry Morley
Senior Independent 
Non-Executive Director
A  N  R
Catherine Glickman
Independent 
Non‑Executive Director
A  N  R
Committee membership
A 	 Audit Committee
N 	 Nomination Committee
R 	 Remuneration Committee
	 Chair of Committee
Experience
100%
80%
100%
Consumer
Finance
PLC
Tenure
	 1–3 years
2
	 6–9 years
3
Gender
	 Male 
60%
	 Female
40%
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
45
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Corporate governance statement
Dear shareholder
I have pleasure in introducing my first Corporate governance 
statement as Chair of TheWorks.co.uk plc.
The Company was Main Market listed, and therefore subject to the 
UK Corporate Governance Code (UKCGC), for the 53-week period 
ended 5 May 2024. As indicated in our announcement signalling 
our move from the Main Market to AIM, the Board agreed that it 
would adopt the QCA Code on Corporate Governance (the QCA 
Code) from AIM admission and, as a minimum, apply the principles 
of the QCA Code (supplemented where relevant by continued 
application of the principles of UKCGC given our governance 
framework was established under that Code). Therefore, the 
following report describes how we have applied the UKCGC 
principles, and complied with its provisions, during FY24, but is 
also structured to demonstrate how we intend to apply the QCA 
principles moving forwards.
The composition of our Board has changed significantly during 
FY24. As signalled in our FY23 Annual Report, we were pleased 
to appoint an internal successor (Rosie Fordham) to the Chief 
Financial Officer role when Steve Alldridge stepped down at the 
end of 2023. Rosie was appointed to the Board on 1 January 2024. 
We are delighted with Rosie’s contribution to date, including 
leading the project to move the Company’s listing to AIM. 
We welcomed John Goold and Mark Kirkland to the Board 
as non-independent Non-Executive Directors in February 2024. 
In making those appointments, the board was mindful that they 
would result in a period of non-compliance with provision 11 of 
UKCGC which states that at least half of the Board (excluding 
the Chair) should be independent non-executive directors. The 
Board consulted with certain of our major shareholders, who were 
supportive of the appointments. The Board was also comfortable 
that the period of non-compliance would be limited given the move 
to AIM, and that the existing Non-Executive Directors (and Chair, who 
was deemed independent on appointment) would bring appropriate 
independence to the Board’s discussions and decision making. 
John Goold and Mark Kirkland stepped down as Directors with 
effect from 1 October 2024.
I was appointed as Non-Executive Chair on 15 July 2024, 
succeeding Carolyn Bradley. The Board would like to reiterate 
its thanks to Carolyn for her support and guidance during her 
three-year tenure on the Board.
Shareholder value driven 
through strong governance
Our robust governance 
framework supports the 
Board’s effective oversight 
of the business.”
Steve Bellamy
Chair 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
46

Although the QCA Code also recommends that at least half of the 
Board (including the Chair if independent on appointment) should 
comprise independent Non-Executive Directors, we meet the minimum 
requirement of at least two independent Non-Executive Directors 
and continue to be satisfied that there is an appropriate balance 
of independence on the Board to protect shareholder and other 
stakeholder interest.
The Board spent a significant amount of time during the year 
on considering, approving and delivering the AIM move, with 
emphasis on the long-term benefits to shareholders and other 
stakeholders resulting from the move (not least the cost savings 
associated with the lighter touch regulatory regime on AIM). The 
economic environment during FY24 continued to be challenging, 
with geopolitical and cost-of-living pressures impacting on consumer 
spend and sales performance. This was therefore also reflected in 
the Board’s discussions, in particular in challenging and supporting 
management in establishing and delivering actions to reset the 
cost base and improve operational efficiency. 
At our 2023 AGM, the resolution proposing a final dividend for 
FY23 did not pass, and the resolutions relating to authorities to allot 
shares (and disapply pre-emption rights) received a significant 
(greater than 20%) vote against. As set out in the announcement 
of our interim results, we consulted with shareholders following 
the AGM to understand the reason for the votes against, which 
included a preference for share buybacks over dividends. The 
Board took the feedback into account; however, given trading for 
the remainder of FY24, we have focused on retaining cash within 
the business and, as stated in the interim results, the Board will 
therefore not be proposing any form of shareholder returns in 
the short term.
An internal Board evaluation process was conducted following the 
financial period end, with the output generally supporting the view 
that the Board and its Committees are operating effectively, but 
identifying some areas (including the frequency of Board meetings 
and Board and senior management succession planning) where 
additional focus may be required to ensure we continue to evolve 
our governance framework and approach in line with the needs of 
the business.
QCA Code – principle 1 – Establish a purpose, strategy 
and business model which promote long-term value 
for shareholders
The Board has collective responsibility for setting the Company’s 
purpose, strategic aims and objectives. Our strategy and business 
model are described in the Strategic report on pages 14 and 15, 
and 12 and 13. The Board continually monitors the implementation 
of strategy, with regular updates on progress against strategic 
pillars (and underlying workstreams) provided through the CEO’s 
report to each Board meeting. There is also an annual Board 
strategy session, and (where appropriate) mid-year reviews are 
conducted.
QCA Code – principle 2 – Promote a corporate culture 
that is based on ethical values and behaviours
The Board recognises that the Company’s culture underpins 
its long-term success, and regularly assesses and monitors 
the Group’s culture. This assessment is conducted through a 
combination of reviews of the output of our regular employee 
engagement surveys, updates from the Chief Retail and People 
Officer through our programme of Operating Board members’ 
‘deep-dive’ presentations to the Board, formal reporting and 
consideration of people related statistics in the monthly Board 
pack, and Board members’ own interactions with colleagues across 
the Group (including through Board or individual Director site visits). 
The strength of our culture and employee engagement activity is 
demonstrated through our strong performance in the annual Best 
CompaniesTM survey, where we were ranked 15th in the top 25 Best 
Big Companies to Work For in 2023. The Board also regularly 
reviews workplace policies and practices to ensure these are 
aligned to the desired culture and are operating effectively.
QCA Code – principle 3 – Seek to understand 
and meet shareholder needs and expectations
The Board recognises the importance of explaining financial results 
and key strategic and operational developments in the business 
to the Company’s shareholders and of understanding any 
shareholder concerns. 
Ensuring a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders and receiving 
reports on the views of shareholders are matters reserved for the 
Board. Day-to-day responsibility for investor relations is delegated 
to the CEO and the CFO, who are supported by the Company’s 
retained financial PR advisers and its Nominated Adviser (Nomad) 
and corporate broker. As part of its investor relations programme, 
the Group aims to maintain a dialogue with its shareholders, 
including institutional investors, to discuss issues relating to the 
performance and governance of the Group. Information and 
investor news are also made available via the Company’s website 
(https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/investors). 
Specific engagement activity between the Board and shareholders 
during the year has included conversations in relation to voting 
at our 2023 AGM (described in the introduction to the Corporate 
governance statement on page 47), assessing views and support 
for the intended move to AIM, and discussions relating to the 
appointment of Non-Executive Directors. 
UK Corporate Governance Code – compliance 
statement (FY24)
During FY24, the Company applied all of the principles of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) as they apply to 
it as a ‘smaller company’ (below FTSE 350) and has complied 
with all relevant provisions of the Code during the year with 
the exception of provision 11 (at least half the board, excluding 
the chair, should be independent non-executive directors) for 
which an explanation for non-compliance is provided above. 
Full details of the Code are available at www.frc.org.uk. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
47
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Corporate governance statement continued
QCA Code – principle 3 – Seek to understand and 
meet shareholder needs and expectations continued
Investor relations is discussed regularly at Board meetings. The 
Executive Directors and the Chair provide feedback directly to the 
Board on key matters arising in their meetings with shareholders, 
ensuring that all Directors are aware of shareholder views. These 
matters are discussed and assessed by the Board before deciding 
on whether any further action or engagement is required.
The Company’s AGM provides a further opportunity for shareholders 
to engage directly with the Board. The Company’s 2024 AGM will 
take place at 9am on 31 October 2024 at the offices of Squire Patton 
Boggs (UK) LLP at 60 London Wall, London EC2M 5TQ. This Annual 
Report and financial statements (including on our website) and 
Notice of the AGM will be made available to shareholders (including 
on our website) in accordance with the required notice periods.
QCA Code – principle 4 – Take into account 
wider stakeholder interests, including social and 
environmental responsibilities and their implications 
for long-term success
We consider our key stakeholders to be our shareholders, our 
employees, our customers, our suppliers and our community. 
The Board recognises the importance of regular engagement 
with our stakeholders in order to listen to, understand and 
consider their views.
The CEO and Operating Board members are responsible for 
the day-to-day management of stakeholder relationships and 
ensuring that stakeholder issues are appropriately reported to the 
Board. Further information on how we engage with stakeholders 
is set out on pages 22 and 23. The Directors recognise their duty 
under Section 172 of the Companies Act to consider the interests 
of stakeholders, and the nature of our business means that the 
interests of our colleagues, customers and suppliers are at the front 
of mind in the Board’s decision-making process. The Company’s 
Section 172 statement is included on page 24.
With respect to workforce engagement, the Board keeps 
engagement methods under review and continues to be of the 
view that the combination of existing engagement mechanisms 
(summarised in the Our stakeholders section on pages 22 and 23) 
ensures that the Board is appropriately informed about, and 
understands, workforce views. Therefore this approach continued to 
appropriately address the requirement to engage with the 
workforce under provision 5 of the UKCGC during FY24. 
Social and environmental issues identified as being important 
to the business, and actions we are taking in those areas, are 
described in the Stakeholder engagement section on page 23 
and ESG review on pages 25 to 29.
QCA Code – principle 5 – Embed effective risk 
management, internal controls and assurance 
activities, considering both opportunities and 
threats, throughout the organisation
The Board has ultimate responsibility for the systems of 
internal control and risk management. The Board has delegated 
responsibility to the Audit Committee to monitor and review the 
effectiveness of those systems.
The Board regularly reviews the corporate risk register, with 
particular focus on the principal risks (including climate-related 
risks) facing the business and emerging risks. Through this review, the 
Board establishes the overall appetite for risk and the appropriateness 
and effectiveness of mitigations in place (through internal controls, 
management actions or otherwise). The Group’s principal risks and 
uncertainties are set out on pages 38 to 43, and the Audit 
Committee report on page 52 to 54 provides more information on 
the systems of risk management and internal control.
QCA Code – principle 6 – Establish and maintain 
the board as a well-functioning, balanced team led 
by the chair
Composition, independence and attendance
From the end of FY23 to February 2024, the Board comprised the 
Chair (Carolyn Bradley, who was independent on appointment), 
two Executive Directors (CEO and CFO) and two independent 
Non-Executive Directors (Harry Morley and Catherine Glickman). 
The composition of the Board therefore satisfied provision 11 of the 
UKCGC for that period with half of the Board (excluding the Chair) 
being independent. Following the appointment of John Goold and 
Mark Kirkland (as representatives of significant shareholder Kelso 
Group Holdings plc, and therefore not deemed to be independent) 
in February 2024, the composition of the Board no longer met the 
provision 11 requirement for the period to AIM admission (when the 
UKCGC ceased to apply to the Company).
Following Steve Bellamy’s appointment as Chair (who was 
independent on appointment and succeeded Carolyn Bradley, 
on 15 July 2024), and John Goold and Mark Kirkland stepping down 
on 1 October 2024, the composition of the Board (and balance of 
independent Directors for QCA Code purposes) is as follows:
Independent Directors
Non-independent Directors
•	 Steve Bellamy (Chair)
•	 Catherine Glickman 
(Non-Executive Director and 
Remuneration Committee Chair)
•	 Harry Morley 
(Senior Independent Director 
and Audit Committee Chair)
•	 Gavin Peck (CEO)
•	 Rosie Fordham (CFO)
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
48

Roles and division of responsibilities
There were no changes to the roles and responsibilities of the 
members of the Board during FY24. As previously reported, there is 
a clear division of responsibilities between the Chair and the CEO 
(with the Chair’s primary role being to lead the Board and ensure its 
independence and effectiveness, and the CEO’s primary role being 
the day-to-day management and leadership of the Company). 
Harry Morley is the Senior Independent Director and his duties in 
that role include acting as a sounding board for the Chair, being 
available as an additional point of contact for shareholders, and 
leading the evaluation of the Chair’s performance.
A representative of Bernwood Cosec Limited (the Company 
Secretary) supports the Board and each of the three Board 
Committees, and attends all meetings. The Company Secretary is 
available to all the Directors to advise on company law, governance 
and best practice, whilst assisting the Board in ensuring that the 
correct policies, processes and information are tabled for discussion, 
noting or approval at the correct point in time throughout the year.
How the Board operates
The Board met ten times during FY24. Its activity at each meeting 
is planned in accordance with a formal schedule of activity which 
is updated on a rolling basis and is approved by the Board. This 
ensures that the Board receives appropriate information at the 
appropriate time and that all key operational, financial reporting 
and governance matters are discussed during the year. In addition 
to standing items, agendas incorporate sufficient flexibility to allow 
specific areas of focus to be considered as and when required. The 
schedule includes regular ‘deep-dive’ presentations from Operating 
Board members on specific areas of their responsibility, which increase 
the Non-Executive Directors’ understanding of key operational 
initiatives and challenges and provide the opportunity for senior 
executives to meet and discuss their areas of responsibility with 
the Board.
A Board pack is circulated in advance of each meeting and 
includes summary reports from the CEO and CFO and covers 
progress against strategic and operational KPIs, and underlying 
supporting data and metrics. The Company Secretary also prepares 
a standard format report for each meeting to ensure the Board is 
kept up to date on recent and upcoming announcements, share 
dealing requests, governance matters including statutory or 
regulatory filings and regulatory or legislative developments which 
may impact the Company. Separate papers are prepared to support 
any specific matters requiring Board decision or approval, or 
to provide updates on actions raised at previous meetings.
The Non-Executive Directors provide ongoing feedback to the 
CEO and CFO on the content of papers to ensure they continue 
to support effective debate and decision making by the Board.
All Directors have direct access to the Operating Board members 
and other senior managers should they require additional information 
on any of the items to be discussed at Board meetings. The Board 
and the Audit Committee also receive regular and specific reports 
to enable monitoring of the effectiveness of the Company’s 
systems of internal control.
Minutes of all Board and Committee meetings are taken by the 
Company Secretary and circulated to Directors for approval as 
soon as practicable following the meetings. Specific actions arising 
from meetings are recorded both in the minutes and on separate 
action logs, thereby facilitating the effective communication 
of actions to those responsible and allowing the Board to 
monitor progress.
Board activity during FY24
During FY24 there were ten scheduled Board meetings, with 
additional Board calls focused on trading performance and matters 
relating to the AIM move. Individual Director attendance at the ten 
scheduled Board meetings and Committee meetings (where they 
are a member) during FY24 is set out in the table below: 
Director
Board
meetings
attended/
eligible to
attend
Audit
Committee
meetings
held/
attended
Remuneration
Committee
meetings
held/
attended
Nomination
Committee
meetings
held/
attended
Carolyn Bradley 
10/10
N/A
3/3
2/2
Gavin Peck
10/10
N/A
N/A
N/A 
Steve Alldridge 
6/6
N/A
N/A
N/A 
Rosie Fordham
4/4
N/A
N/A
N/A
Catherine Glickman
10/10
4/4
3/3
2/2
Harry Morley
10/10
4/4
3/3
2/2
John Goold
2/3
N/A
N/A
N/A 
Mark Kirkland
2/3
N/A
N/A
N/A 
In addition to the formal meetings, the Board’s activity also 
included store visits (linked to its Board meeting in June 2023, and 
a separate strategy session in November 2023), with the strategy 
session also including visits to competitor stores. Board meetings 
have also included store set-up and range reviews in our ‘Mock 
Shop’ located in the Boldmere House head office.
All Directors are expected to attend all meetings of the Board 
and any Committees of which they are members, and to devote 
sufficient time to the Company’s affairs to fulfil their duties as 
Directors. The Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment 
anticipate that each Non-Executive Director will need to commit 
a minimum of two days per month to the Company but clarify 
that more time may be required. In addition, the Non-Executive 
Directors are expected to commit appropriate preparation time 
ahead of each meeting and to stay up to date on industry matters.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
49
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Corporate governance statement continued
Appointment and election
The Board considers all Directors to be effective and committed 
to their roles and to have sufficient time to perform their duties. 
As announced on 1 August 2024, Catherine Glickman will not stand 
for reappointment at the AGM on 31 October 2024 and a search for 
her replacement is underway. John Goold and Mark Kirkland stepped 
down from the Board on 1 October 2024 and will therefore not stand 
for appointment at the AGM. In accordance with the Company’s 
Articles of Association (the Articles), Gavin Peck and Harry Morley 
will be offering themselves for reappointment, and Steve Bellamy 
and Rosie Fordham of the Board (having being appointed since 
our AGM in 2023) will stand for appointment at the Company’s 
AGM on 31 October 2024. 
All of the Directors have service agreements or letters of 
appointment and the details of their terms are set out below.
Executive Director service contracts
Name
Position
Date of
service
agreement
Notice 
period by 
Company
(months)
Notice 
period by
 Director
(months)
Gavin Peck
CEO
19 July 2018
12
12
Rosie Fordham
CFO
1 January 2024
6
6
The Non-Executive Directors (including the Chair) do not 
have service contracts, but are instead appointed by letters 
of appointment which include a three-month notice period on 
either side. Each of the Non-Executive Directors and the Chair 
are appointed for a three-year term, subject to their annual 
reappointment by shareholders at the AGM.
•	 Overall leadership of the Group.
•	 Oversees and embeds sound principles of corporate governance.
•	 Ensures appropriate policies, procedures and controls are in 
place to support effective risk management and performance 
against agreed financial and operational metrics.
•	 Sets strategy, purpose, values and culture.
•	 Approves major contractual commitments.
•	 Approves business plan and budget. 
•	 Sets and oversees environment and climate strategy 
and related targets.
Certain matters are reserved to the Board and formally documented in a Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board. The Board 
has delegated a number of its responsibilities to the Audit Committee, Nomination Committee and Remuneration Committee. The 
Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board and each Committee’s terms of reference are available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/
who-we-are/corporate-governance. 
Audit Committee
Nomination Committee
Remuneration Committee
•	 Reviews annual and interim 
financial statements.
•	 Reviews accounting policies, 
financial reporting and 
regulatory compliance.
•	 Reviews internal control and risk 
management systems.
•	 Monitors processes for internal audit, 
risk management and external audit.
•	 Monitors independence of 
external auditor.
•	 Oversees relationship with 
external auditor.
•	 Identifies and nominates 
appointments to the Board.
•	 Reviews Non-Executive Directors’ 
time commitments.
•	 Oversees succession planning.
•	 Reviews size and composition 
of the Board.
•	 Promotes diversity.
•	 Undertakes annual performance 
evaluation of the Board, its 
Committees and individual Directors.
•	 Sets Remuneration Policy.
•	 Determines Executive Director and 
senior management remuneration.
•	 Approves annual bonus plan and 
Long‑Term Incentive Plan targets.
•	 Reviews workforce remuneration 
policies and practices.
•	 Ensures that provisions regarding 
disclosure of remuneration 
are fulfilled.
 Read more in the 
Audit Committee report 
on pages 52 to 54
 Read more in the 
Nomination Committee report 
on pages 55 and 56
 Read more in the 
Remuneration Committee report 
on pages 57 to 66
Board
•	 Reports to the CEO, responsible for the day-to-day trading 
activities of the Group and implementing the strategy agreed 
by the Board. 
•	 Monitors performance against financial and operational targets 
and manages risk. 
Information about the Operating Board is available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/our-leadership.
Operating Board
QCA Code – principle 6 – Establish and maintain the board as a well-functioning, balanced team led 
by the chair continued
Board activity during FY24 continued
Where Directors are unable to attend a meeting, they are encouraged to submit any comments on papers or matters to be discussed 
to the Chair in advance to ensure that their views are recorded and taken into account during the meeting.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
50

Non-Executive Director appointments
Name
Date of
appointment
Appointment letter 
commencement 
date
Unexpired
 term as at
31 October 2024
Steve Bellamy
15 July 2024
15 July 2024
33 months
Catherine 
Glickman
19 July 2018
26 July 2022
9 months
Harry Morley
19 July 2018
26 July 2022
9 months
Conflicts of interest and external appointments
In accordance with the Board’s approved procedure relating to 
the disclosure of any conflicts or potential conflicts of interest, all 
Directors have confirmed that they did not have any conflicts of 
interest with the Group during the year.
In accordance with provision 15 of the UKCGC, Harry Morley 
sought Board approval prior to taking on his additional role as 
a Non-Executive Director of Schroder Mid Cap UK Fund plc during 
the year. No other Director took on an additional external role 
during the year.
QCA Code – principle 7 – Maintain appropriate 
governance structure and ensure that individually 
and collectively the directors have the necessary 
up-to-date experience, skills and capabilities
The Group’s governance structure has not changed during the year 
and is set out in the diagram opposite: 
Training and development
The efficient and effective operation of the Board depends on the 
ability of individual Directors (and in particular the Non-Executive 
Directors) to bring the benefit of their own business knowledge 
and experience. Ensuring that all Directors have an in-depth 
understanding of the Company’s own operations is an important 
element in enabling the benefit of that experience and we seek to 
support this understanding through the detailed materials circulated 
in advance of Board meetings, as well as collective and individual 
Director site visits or days out in stores, which are usually accompanied 
by different members of the Operating Board.
We also expect our Directors to keep themselves up to date in 
relation to developments in regulation and corporate governance 
best practice. As highlighted above the Company Secretary ensures 
that the Board is briefed on forthcoming legal and regulatory 
developments, and Directors are encouraged to attend externally 
facilitated seminars, webinars and workshops to develop their 
knowledge and experience in particular areas relevant to their 
role with the business.
QCA Code – principle 8 – Evaluate board 
performance based on clear and relevant objectives 
seeking continuous improvement
During FY24, and in accordance with provision 21 of the UKCGC, 
the Board again considered whether it would be appropriate to 
conduct an externally facilitated evaluation process during the 
year. Our view was unchanged that, given the size of the Board 
and changes in composition during the year, the relative cost of 
an externally facilitated process, and a desire to allow the Executive 
Directors to maintain focus on managing the business in a challenging 
environment without unnecessary distraction, an internal evaluation 
process would again be the best approach. 
The evaluation was conducted by way of detailed questionnaires 
completed by the Directors who served for the duration of the year, 
with the opportunity for free form qualitative comments to be provided 
to support discussion around areas for improved Board effectiveness. 
The results of the evaluation were summarised and considered 
by the Board following the financial period end, and provided to 
Steve Bellamy (the incoming Chair) to consider areas of improvement 
to be taken forward. Overall, the evaluation exercise found that the 
Board had operated efficiently and effectively during the year, with 
the appropriate level of support and constructive challenge provided 
to management. Particular areas identified for further focus in 
FY25 include:
•	 How the Board receives assurance over the effectiveness of 
internal controls (with specific further consideration required 
around a potential internal audit function). 
•	 Ensuring that diversity factors and appropriate industry 
experience are reflected in the succession planning processes 
for the Board and senior management.
Progress made in addressing some of the actions identified in the 
FY23 evaluation process is summarised below:
Actions
Progress in FY24
Hold an extended two-day 
meeting each year to 
accommodate store visits 
alongside a strategy review
Successful two-day Board 
meeting/strategy session 
incorporating store and 
competitor site visits held 
in November 2023
Consider the level of detail 
required in Operating Board 
reports to the Board, including 
whether they could be 
more succinct
Full review of management’s 
Board pack conducted during 
FY24, with feedback from NEDs, 
and new version introduced 
from May 2024
QCA Code – principle 9 – Establish a remuneration 
policy which is supportive of long-term value creation 
and the company’s purpose, strategy and culture
Details of the Company’s Remuneration Policy and how it was 
implemented during FY24 are set out in the Directors’ remuneration 
report on pages 57 to 66.
QCA Code – principle 10 – Communicate how the 
company is governed and is performing by maintaining 
a dialogue with shareholders and other key stakeholders
The Board’s approach to engaging with shareholders and other 
stakeholders is described throughout the Annual Report, in particular 
in the Our stakeholders section and Section 172 statement on 
pages 22 to 24, the ESG review on page 25 and the disclosures 
under principles 3 and 4 of the QCA Code above.
Steve Bellamy
Chair
1 October 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
51
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Audit Committee report
Dear shareholder
I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s report for 
the 53‑week period ended 5 May 2024. The report sets out 
the Committee’s work in relation to financial reporting, internal 
control and audit, risk management and oversight of the 
external audit process.
Composition of Committee, role and main activities 
in FY24
The Committee’s members, its role and main activities are detailed 
in the adjacent panel. Given my qualification as a Chartered 
Accountant, executive background in finance roles, and broader 
audit committee chair experience, Steve’s experience in chairing two 
other PLC audit committees, and Catherine’s significant knowledge 
and experience in the retail sector, the Board is satisfied that the 
Committee composition is such that it understands the risks facing 
the business and is able to be robust and challenging in its review 
of the Company’s financial position and performance. 
Activity during the year
The Committee met on four occasions during the year, and has 
met twice since the year end. All meetings were attended by all 
members of the Committee as shown in the table on page 49.
The external auditor has the right to attend meetings, and the 
Board Chair and Executive Directors typically attend each meeting 
by invitation. Other members of the management team may also 
attend meetings by invitation from time to time. 
Outside of the formal meeting programme, the Audit Committee 
Chair maintains a dialogue with key individuals involved in the 
Company’s governance, including the Chair, the CEO, the CFO and 
the external auditor. At least twice per year, the Committee also 
meets the external auditor without members of the management 
team present.
Members
•	 Harry Morley (Chair)
•	 Steve Bellamy
•	 Catherine Glickman
Number of meetings held in the year:
4
Committee’s role and responsibilities
•	 Reviews the annual financial statements, including 
accounting estimates and judgements.
•	 Assists the Board with the discharge of its responsibilities 
in relation to the external audit including audit scope, 
external auditor appointment and the extent of non-audit 
work undertaken by the external auditor.
•	 Reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control 
and risk management systems.
•	 Monitors the Group’s internal audit arrangements. 
Terms of reference: 
Available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/
corporate-governance
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
52

The Committee’s activities during the year are set out in the table below.
Audit Committee activity in FY24
 
Financial statements and reporting
Risk management and internal control systems
•	 Reviewed significant accounting estimates and 
judgements in connection with half-year and 
full-year financial statements.
•	 Reviewed half-year and full-year financial 
statements and associated narrative reporting, 
and recommended approval of them by the Board.
•	 Reviewed scenario analysis in support of going 
concern assessment.
•	 Received updates on profit protection, including stock count process.
•	 Reviewed internal financial controls, and progress against agreed 
improvement plans.
•	 Reviewed delegated authorities.
•	 Reviewed and challenged risk register, principal risks facing the business, 
and process for identifying emerging risks.
External audit relationship
Governance and other matters
•	 Received and reviewed FY24 audit plan 
and strategy.
•	 Reviewed effectiveness of FY23 audit process.
•	 Led the tender leading to the appointment 
of Kreston Reeves LLP as auditor.
•	 Agreed audit fees.
•	 Approved FY24 tax strategy.
•	 Reviewed payment practices reporting and performance against supplier 
payment terms.
•	 Reviewed Audit Committee terms of reference.
Significant issues considered in relation to the financial statements
Significant issues and accounting judgements are identified by the finance team and through the external audit process and are 
reviewed by the Audit Committee. The significant issues considered by the Committee in respect of the 53-week period ended 5 May 2024 
are set out in the table below.
Significant issues and judgements
How the issues were addressed
Going concern
The Committee considered the appropriateness of applying the going concern convention in 
the preparation of the financial statements, particularly in light of the material uncertainty 
that was included in the FY23 financial statements. The Committee noted that the 
renegotiation of the Fixed charge covenant in April 2024 (as part of the move to AIM) 
resulted in improved headroom against the fixed charge covenant, and even under the 
‘severe but plausible’ downside scenario model prepared to assess the appropriateness of 
the basis of preparation, the Group would have sufficient headroom within its current bank 
facility, and would not breach either of its bank covenants. The financial statements have 
therefore been prepared on a going concern basis.
Impairment of property, plant and equipment, 
right-of-use assets and intangibles 
The Committee considered the approach taken to calculating the value in use estimate 
used in assessing the impairment of store fixed assets and the IFRS 16 right of use asset. 
These utilise detailed cash forecasts which also form the basis for the going concern review. 
Having reviewed the models prepared by management, the Committee is satisfied with 
the impairment recognised.
Carrying value of Parent Company investments
Judgement is required to assess the carrying value of the investment by the Parent Company 
in its subsidiary undertakings (primarily The Works Stores Limited) for impairment, which is 
routinely a key source of estimation uncertainty. The methodology and assumptions used 
in estimating the value in use is broadly similar to that used for store impairment. The 
Committee reviewed the assessment made by management and concluded that the 
impairment recognised in the financial year was appropriate.
Existence, completeness and valuation of inventory
As noted in the ‘Risk management and internal control’ section of the Committee’s report, 
the Committee reviewed the Group’s arrangements for improving stock control processes 
during the year. After consideration of the accuracy of the provisioning model, the Committee 
concluded that it is satisfied with the accounting treatment of the valuation of inventory.
External auditor and audit tender
The external auditor at the beginning of the year was KPMG LLP. By mutual consent, and in connection with the decision to move 
the Company’s listing to AIM, it was agreed that KPMG LLP would resign as external auditor and that the Company would tender 
the audit.
The Audit Committee considered three firms as part of the tender process, and after careful consideration it was agreed to appoint 
Kreston Reeves LLP. The Committee is satisfied with Kreston Reeves LLP’s performance in relation to the FY24 audit, and has 
recommended to the Board that a resolution to reappoint Kreston Reeves as auditor be proposed at the 2024 AGM.
The Audit Committee oversees the relationship with the external auditor to ensure that independence and objectivity are maintained. 
This includes monitoring the tenure of the external auditor and audit partner, and the nature and extent of any non-audit services that 
the external auditor is engaged to provide. 
Audit process
At the outset of the audit process, the auditor presents a detailed audit plan to the Committee, identifying its assessment of the key audit 
matters, intended areas of focus and the audit approach. The audit plan also sets out the scope of the audit, materiality thresholds and 
the audit timetable.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
53
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

External auditor and audit tender continued
Non-audit services
The engagement of the external audit firm to provide non-audit 
services to the Group can impact on the independence assessment, 
and the Audit Committee keeps the nature and extent of non‑audit 
services (and non-audit fees which are set out in Note 6 to the 
financial statements) under review and ensures that any non-audit 
services are approved in accordance with the agreed policy.
When reviewing requests for non-audit services the Audit 
Committee will assess:
•	 Whether the provision of such services impairs the auditor’s 
independence or objectivity and any safeguards in place to 
eliminate or reduce such threats.
•	 The nature of the non-audit services.
•	 Whether the skills and experience make the auditor the most 
suitable supplier of the non-audit service.
•	 The fee to be incurred for non-audit services, both for individual 
non-audit services and in aggregate, relative to the Group 
audit fee.
•	 The criteria which govern the compensation of the individuals 
performing the audit.
During the year, no non-audit services were carried out by 
Kreston Reeves LLP.
Risk management and internal control
The Board has overall responsibility for maintaining sound 
internal control and risk management systems and has delegated 
responsibility to monitor their effectiveness to the Committee. 
During the year, the Committee has discharged this responsibility 
through regular reviews of the Group’s risk register (and challenging 
management on the classification of risks and effectiveness of 
mitigations), as well as specific and detailed updates on profit 
protection and supply chain risks. 
The Group’s system of internal control comprises entity-wide 
high-level controls, controls over business processes and store‑level 
controls. Policies and procedures and defined levels of delegated 
authority have been approved and communicated across the 
Group, and include an Internal Control Framework, corporate risk 
register, business continuity plan and IT system policies. These 
are supplemented by other policies and procedures which are 
communicated to colleagues through the employee handbook.
Management has identified the key operational and financial 
processes which exist and implemented internal controls over these 
processes in addition to the higher-level review and authorisation-
based controls. These policies are designed to ensure the accuracy 
and reliability of financial reporting and govern the preparation of 
the financial statements. 
The Committee is satisfied that the internal controls and risk 
management systems, including processes to identify and improve 
such systems and controls where necessary, continue to 
operate effectively.
Internal audit
The Group does not currently have an internal audit function. 
During the year, the Committee reviewed the Group’s control 
framework and the extent to which it received assurance over the 
effectiveness of those controls. The Committee (and management) 
agreed that, while there was no immediate need for an internal 
audit function, there should be an aspiration to establish a value 
additive internal audit function in the medium term.
Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the performance of the Committee was 
conducted as part of the broader Board evaluation process set 
out on page 51 of this Annual Report. I am pleased to report that 
feedback relating to the Committee was positive, indicating that 
the Committee continues to operate effectively.
Harry Morley
Chair of the Audit Committee
1 October 2024
Audit Committee report continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
54

Nomination Committee report
Dear shareholder
The following report summarises the work of the Nomination 
Committee during the year. 
Composition of Committee, role and main activities 
in FY24
The Committee’s members, its role and main activities are detailed 
in the adjacent panel.
Meetings and attendees
The Committee met twice during the year. Both meetings were 
attended by all members of the Committee as shown in the table 
on page 49.
Only members of the Committee have the right to attend meetings, 
but the CEO and Chief People and Retail Officer are invited to 
attend as appropriate, particularly when executive succession 
planning and other workforce related matters are being discussed. 
Other Directors, executives or advisers may be invited to attend all 
or part of any meeting as appropriate.
Members
•	 Steve Bellamy (Chair) (from 15 July 2024)
•	 Carolyn Bradley (Chair) (until 15 July 2024)
•	 Catherine Glickman
•	 Harry Morley
Number of meetings held in the year
2
Committee’s role and responsibilities
•	 Oversees succession planning.
•	 Identifies and nominates appointments to the Board.
•	 Reviews Non-Executive Directors’ time commitments.
•	 Reviews size and composition of the Board.
•	 Promotes diversity.
Main activities in FY24 and FY25 to date
•	 Succession planning at Board and senior management level.
•	 Carolyn Bradley replaced by Steve Bellamy as Chair.
•	 Recruitment commenced for a new Non-Executive Director 
to replace Catherine Glickman. 
Terms of reference: 
Available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/
corporate-governance
Increasing value retail 
experience is a key factor 
in our Board succession 
planning and will support 
a diverse mix of skills 
and experience across 
the Board.”
Steve Bellamy
Chair of the Nomination Committee 
Ensuring an experienced 
and effective Board
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
55
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Succession planning
The Committee discussed Board succession planning and in 
particular the need to manage the timing of NED changes given 
that both Catherine Glickman and Harry Morley were appointed 
at the time of the IPO. As reported last year, the Committee has 
agreed in principle that Catherine and Harry will step down in a 
staggered fashion. We have announced since the year end that 
Catherine Glickman will not seek reappointment at the 2024 AGM 
and, given their respective key roles as Chairs of the Remuneration 
and Audit Committees, that there may be some overlap between 
the appointment of Harry and Catherine’s replacements and the 
date that they step down.
The Committee has also agreed that Board diversity and a retail 
background will be key factors in any search process for new 
Non-Executive Directors, albeit recognising that appointments 
will always be made on merit and based on objective criteria.
We were delighted to announce that Rosie Fordham succeeded 
Steve Alldridge as CFO in line with our agreed internal succession plans. 
Board appointments
John Goold and Mark Kirkland were appointed as Non-Executive 
Directors on 14 February 2024 as representatives of Kelso Group 
Holdings plc, a significant shareholder in the Company. Although 
there was no formal search process in relation to their appointment, 
the Board did consult with other major shareholders who indicated 
support for the appointments. It was agreed that John and Mark, 
not being deemed to be independent, would not join the 
Board Committees. John Goold and Mark Kirkland stepped down 
as Directors on 1 October 2024.
Following Carolyn Bradley’s decision to step down as Chair and 
a Director of the Company, the process that led to my appointment 
was overseen by Harry Morley (as Senior Independent Director), 
supported by Catherine Glickman (the other member of the 
Nomination Committee) and the rest of the Board. 
Diversity and inclusion (D&I)
The Committee is responsible for monitoring compliance with the 
objectives of the Board Diversity Policy (the D&I policy). The Committee 
reviewed the D&I policy during the year, and is comfortable that it 
remains appropriate.
The current balance of gender on our Board is 40% female and 60% 
male (FY23: 22% female and 78% male).
Other matters considered
At its meeting in April 2024 the Committee conducted its annual 
review of the size, structure and composition of the Board, the 
independence of the Non-Executive Directors, and Non-Executive 
Director time commitments. The Committee concluded that the 
size, structure and composition of the Board and its Committees 
remained appropriate taking into account the size and cost structure 
of the business, and that the Board’s balance of skills and experience 
was appropriate and supports effective debate and decision making.
None of the factors which could impact the independence of our 
independent Non-Executive Directors (as set out in provision 10 of 
the Code) apply to Catherine Glickman and Harry Morley, both of 
whom were appointed in 2018 and therefore remain well within the 
recommended maximum nine-year term. The Board is therefore 
satisfied that they remain independent in thought and judgement. 
As disclosed previously, John Goold and Mark Kirkland are not 
deemed to be independent given their roles with Kelso Group 
Holdings plc, a significant shareholder in the Company.
All of the Non-Executive Directors have confirmed that they 
continue to be able to devote sufficient time to fulfil their roles 
as Directors of the Company. 
Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the Committee’s performance in FY24 was 
conducted as part of the wider Board evaluation process 
described on page 51. 
Steve Bellamy
Chair of the Nomination Committee
1 October 2024
Nomination Committee report continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
56

Directors’ remuneration report
Chair of the Remuneration Committee’s letter to shareholders
Dear shareholder
As Chair of the Remuneration Committee, I present our Directors’ 
remuneration report for the 53-week period ended 5 May 2024.
Although the Company moved from the Main Market to AIM on 
3 May 2024, the statutory reporting regime for Main Market listed 
companies applies to our FY24 Directors’ remuneration report in 
accordance with applicable regulations. This report therefore includes 
the Annual report on remuneration, which sets out payments made 
to the Directors and demonstrates how Company performance and 
remuneration were aligned during FY24. From FY25 onwards, this 
reporting regime will not apply to the Company, and we therefore 
intend that our remuneration disclosures will be amended 
accordingly to reflect our status as an AIM quoted business.
Our Directors’ Remuneration Policy was approved at our 2022 AGM 
after taking account of the views of our shareholders, with over 
99% of votes cast in favour, and minor amendments to that policy in 
relation to the maximum LTIP opportunity and in-service shareholding 
guidelines were approved at our 2023 AGM, again with over 99% of 
votes cast in favour. Since we are not seeking approval for a Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy at the 2024 AGM, in line with the applicable 
regulations, we have not included the policy in this report. The policy 
is set out in our FY22 Annual Report (with amendments summarised 
in our FY23 Annual Report), both of which are available on our website.
Members
•	 Catherine Glickman (Chair)
•	 Steve Bellamy (member from 15 July 2024)
•	 Carolyn Bradley (member until 15 July 2024)
•	 Harry Morley 
Committee’s role
•	 Sets Remuneration Policy.
•	 Determines Executive Director and senior 
management remuneration.
•	 Approves annual bonus and LTIP targets.
•	 Reviews workforce remuneration policies and practices.
Main activities during FY24
•	 Approved LTIP awards and targets.
•	 Set and monitored annual bonus targets and outturn.
•	 Reviewed Executive Director salaries.
•	 Considered Operating Board Director salaries following 
restructure of senior team.
•	 Reviewed wider workforce pay and benefits.
Remuneration that incentivises 
performance and aligns with 
shareholder interests
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
57
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

FY24 remuneration in the context of our 
business performance
As detailed in the Strategic report, in a year of significant change 
the Group delivered performance in line with revised market 
expectations for FY24, with total revenue growth of 0.9% (despite 
a LFL sales decline of 0.9%) (FY23: growth of 5.8% and LFL increase 
of 4.2%) and Adjusted EBITDA of £6.0m (FY23: restated £9.6m). 
The FY24 bonus opportunity for Gavin Peck and Rosie Fordham 
was up to a maximum of 100% of salary, with 80% of the award 
based on stretching EBITDA targets and the remaining 20% based 
on performance against key strategic objectives (details of the 
measures and targets are set out on page 60). As noted above, 
our Adjusted EBITDA result for FY24 was in line with revised market 
expectations but was below our original EBITDA budget and the 
threshold level of post-bonus EBITDA performance for Executive 
Director bonuses. Therefore, notwithstanding the Committee’s 
assessment that Gavin and Rosie have performed well in their 
roles, and in particular in supporting the business, pivot to focus 
on stabilising profitability by improving margins and reducing cost 
(including delivering the move to AIM), no bonus was payable to 
the Executive Directors for FY24.
As signalled in the FY23 Directors’ remuneration report, during FY24 
the Committee reviewed the Adjusted EPS measures for in-flight 
Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards to ensure they could be 
assessed on a fair and consistent basis. The Committee concluded 
that the Adjusted EPS targets for in-flight and future LTIP awards 
would be assessed based on pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA, at the thresholds 
at which the original Adjusted EPS targets were calculated. As a 
result, the LTIP award made to Gavin Peck in September 2021 was 
assessed subject to performance conditions based on pre-IFRS 16 
EBITDA performance in FY24 and a share price target. Details of the 
targets are set out on page 60. As the threshold targets for both 
the pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA (£12.0m) and share price (57 pence) were not 
met, the award lapsed in full.
Remuneration across the business
The Committee continues to make decisions on remuneration for 
the Executive Directors in the context of decisions for colleagues 
across the Group.
For FY25, salaries for colleagues in retail have increased in line with 
the National Minimum Wage and National Living Wage, with further 
investment in the management grades to maintain appropriate 
differentials. Salaries for Distribution Centre and Support Centre 
roles increased in line with the National Living Wage where relevant 
with further investment in certain grades to maintain appropriate 
differentials, and outside of that, an average increase of 3% was 
applied. As a result, the average increase across retail management, 
all National Minimum and National Living Wage increases and the 
Support Centre team was 9.4%.
We have continued to support our employee communications 
and engagement platform (MyWorks by Reward Gateway) which 
offers colleagues discounts and money saving offers with a number 
of businesses and services. In response to the cost-of-living crisis 
we also launched Wagestream, an app that offers all colleagues 
a range of financial wellbeing tools, including early access to 
earned wages as well as savings account access and financial 
wellbeing resources. 
In April 2024, the Board agreed a restructure of our Operating 
Board which resulted in a reduction in the number of Operating 
Board Directors and an increase in responsibilities for those that 
remained. The Committee therefore approved salary increases 
to the Operating Board Directors (other than Gavin Peck and 
Rosie Fordham) in connection with the restructure.
The Operating Board restructure is expected to deliver small 
savings in FY25, net of re-investment in leadership roles.
Approach to remuneration for FY25
No changes to our Directors’ Remuneration Policy are proposed 
for FY25.
As disclosed in the FY23 Directors’ remuneration report, on 
her appointment as CFO, Rosie Fordham’s base salary was set 
at £180k per annum with the intention (subject to her performance 
in the role) that this would increase to £200k for FY25 and £220k 
for FY26. Rosie’s performance since taking on the CFO role has 
exceeded expectations, including taking a lead role in the move 
to AIM immediately upon appointment. Following the Operating 
Board restructure, Rosie’s remit has also increased to include the 
Group’s IT and property functions. The Committee therefore agreed 
that, to reflect Rosie’s increased responsibilities, it was appropriate 
that her salary be increased to £220k per annum with effect from 
1 May 2024.
Steve Bellamy was appointed as Chair of the Board with effect 
from 15 July 2024, replacing Carolyn Bradley. Steve’s fee as Chair 
was agreed at £105k, the same level as was paid to Carolyn.
There will be no increase to Gavin Peck’s salary, and no changes 
to the fees for the Non-Executive Directors and Chair, for FY25.
The maximum bonus opportunity for both Executive Directors will 
remain at 100% of base salary, with 80% of the maximum opportunity 
subject to EBITDA performance, and the remaining 20% subject to 
strategic measures.
Stakeholder engagement
I would like to thank the Executive Directors, the Operating Board 
Directors and all our colleagues at The Works for their continued 
commitment, enthusiasm and hard work during FY24. 
Our colleagues are a vital part of our customer experience. We 
continue to be a company in which colleagues can develop their 
careers, with the majority of colleagues being internally developed 
and 10% promoted in the last year. We are delighted that we continue 
to be recognised as one of the 25 Best Big Companies to Work For. 
The Board continues to receive regular updates on colleague 
wellbeing, morale, retention and health and safety and visits stores 
and engages with colleagues regularly. We review the annual Best 
CompaniesTM engagement survey results, in which colleagues provide 
feedback on leadership, personal growth and giving something 
back, as well as pay and benefits, and these inform decisions 
on remuneration.
On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank shareholders for their 
support for our Policy at the 2023 AGM. I remain happy to receive 
any questions or feedback from shareholders at any time, and 
hope that you will be happy to support the advisory resolution to 
approve our Annual report on remuneration which will be proposed 
at our 2024 AGM.
Catherine Glickman
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
1 October 2024
Directors’ remuneration report continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
58

This report has been prepared in accordance with applicable regulations.
Composition of the Committee
The members of the Committee at the date of this report are Catherine Glickman (Chair), Steve Bellamy (from 15 July 2024) and Harry Morley. 
Carolyn Bradley also served as a member of the Committee up to 15 July 2024 when she stepped down from the Board.
Duties and responsibilities
The Committee’s key responsibilities are detailed in the panel on page 57.
As part of its work, the Committee reviewed the remuneration for the wider workforce and related policies and takes these into account 
when setting the policy for Executive Director and senior management remuneration. 
Meetings and attendees
The Committee met a total of three times during the year and has met once since the year end. All members attended those meetings 
as shown in the table on page 49. The Committee receives assistance from the CEO, CFO, Chief People and Retail Officer and Company 
Secretary, who attend meetings by invitation, except when issues relating to their own remuneration are being discussed.
Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the performance of the Committee was conducted as part of the broader Board evaluation process set out on page 51. 
Feedback relating to the Committee indicated that it continues to operate effectively, with all members (and other attendees) 
contributing appropriately to debate and discussion around remuneration matters.
Advisers
Deloitte LLP (Deloitte) is retained to provide independent advice to the Committee as required. Deloitte is a member of the Remuneration 
Consultants Group and, as such, voluntarily operated under that group’s Code of Conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting 
in the UK. Deloitte’s fees for providing remuneration advice to the Committee were £13,975 for FY24. The Committee assesses from time to 
time whether this appointment remains appropriate or should be put out to tender and takes into account the Remuneration Consultants 
Group Code of Conduct when considering this.
Deloitte was appointed by the Committee and has provided share scheme advice and general remuneration advice to the Company.
Single figure table – audited information
The table below sets out total remuneration in respect of FY24 for each person who served as a Director in that year, along with the 
corresponding remuneration for FY23:
Salary and
fees 1
£000
Benefits 2
£000
Pension 3
£000
Annual
bonus 4
£000
Long-term
incentive 5
£000
Total
£000
Total fixed
 remuneration
£000
Total variable
 remuneration
£000
Executive Directors
Gavin Peck
2024
324
13
10
—
—
347
347
—
2023
309
13
9
—
—
331
331
—
Steve Alldridge6 
(resigned 
31 December 2023)
2024
155
9
5
—
—
169
169
—
2023
216
12
6
—
—
234
234
—
Rosie Fordham
(appointed 
1 January 2024)
2024
60
3
2
—
—
65
65
—
2023
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Non-Executive 
Directors
Carolyn Bradley
2024
103
—
—
N/A
N/A
103
103
N/A
2023
100
—
—
N/A
N/A
100
100
N/A
Harry Morley
2024
58
—
—
N/A
N/A
58
58
N/A
2023
57
—
—
N/A
N/A
57
57
N/A
Catherine Glickman
2024
53
—
—
N/A
N/A
53
53
N/A
2023
52
—
—
N/A
N/A
52
52
N/A
John Goold7 
(appointed 
14 February 2024)
2024
—
—
—
N/A
N/A
—
—
N/A
2023
—
—
—
N/A
N/A
—
—
N/A
Mark Kirkland7 
(appointed 
14 February 2024)
2024
—
—
—
N/A
N/A
—
—
N/A
2023
—
—
—
N/A
N/A
—
—
N/A
1 	 Salary and fees: The amount of salary/fees earned in respect of the year.
2	 Benefits: The taxable value of benefits received in the year: these are principally private medical insurance and car or car allowance. For the Executive 
Directors the benefits figures include SAYE options granted in the relevant period where applicable, valued as the aggregate discount of the exercise 
price from the share price used to determine the exercise price. 
Annual report on remuneration
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
59
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Single figure table – audited information continued
3	 Pension: The pension figure represents the cash value of pension contributions for the Executive Director to the defined contribution pension arrangement 
and any cash payments in lieu of pension contributions made in the year.
4	 Annual bonus: The cash value of the bonus earned in respect of the financial year. Further information in relation to the FY23 bonuses is set out below; 
no bonuses were earned by the Executive Directors in respect of FY24.
5	 Long-term incentives: Gavin Peck was granted an LTIP award in September 2021 subject to the performance conditions set out below. The threshold 
performance levels were not met and the award has lapsed. 
6	 Steve Alldridge’s remuneration for FY24 is for the period to his resignation from the Board. Rosie Fordham’s remuneration is from her appointment date.
7	 John Goold and Mark Kirkland do not receive any remuneration in respect of their appointment as Non-Executive Directors. Instead, the Company pays 
Kelso Limited (a subsidiary of Kelso Group Holdings plc) an aggregate fee of £50k per annum.
Annual incentive plan – audited information
Each Executive Director was eligible to earn a bonus in respect of FY24 of up to 100% of salary. 80% of the award was based on EBITDA 
targets (required to be achieved after funding of any bonus payments triggered) which were considered to be suitably stretching. The 
remaining 20% was based on performance against key strategic objectives as set out below, with any payout in respect of the strategic 
objectives element being subject to the achievement of a threshold level of EBITDA performance. 
As shown in the table below, actual Adjusted EBITDA outperformance above the threshold target was not sufficient to support a threshold 
bonus level and, therefore, no bonus was earned by either Executive Director in respect of this element for the year.
EBITDA element
Performance
£m
Vesting
(% of maximum 
for EBITDA 
element)
Actual 
performance
£m
Bonus earned for 
EBITDA element
(% of maximum 
for EBITDA 
element)
Bonus earned 
for EBITDA 
element
(% of salary)
Threshold
9.25
20%
6.0
0%
0%
Maximum
11.25
100%
Strategic objectives element
Strategic objectives for Executive Directors related to the development of the Company’s brand (both externally and internally), driving 
the implementation of strategy and continuing to develop both leaders and colleagues. As the Adjusted EBITDA performance measure 
was not met, no bonus was earned by reference to the strategic objectives.
Long-term incentives
LTIP award vesting
Gavin Peck was granted an LTIP award in the form of nil-cost options over 638,297 shares in September 2021. The award was subject 
to performance conditions set out below, general and windfall gain underpins, and a two-year post-vesting holding period. 
Measure
Weighting
Threshold 
(20% vesting)
Maximum (100% 
vesting)
Actual performance
Pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA1
50%
£12m
£20m
£6.0m
Share price2
50%
£0.57
£2
24.72p
1	 These are the pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA targets which were substituted for the original EPS targets as described in the letter from the Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee on page 58.
2	 The average share price over the period of four weeks beginning with the announcement by the Company of its Full Year Trading Update for its 2023/24 
financial year.
As shown above, the threshold targets have not been met and accordingly the LTIP award has lapsed in full. 
Long-term incentives – awards granted during FY24 – audited information
LTIP awards were granted on 9 October 2023 to Gavin Peck and Rosie Fordham with values equal to 150% and 100% of their base 
salaries respectively:
Type of award
Maximum
opportunity
Number of
shares
Face value at
grant £ 1
% of award vesting
at threshold
Performance period2
Gavin Peck
LTIP
150% of salary
1,216,687
486,675
20%
See footnote 2
Rosie Fordham
LTIP
100% of salary 3
450,000
180,000
20%
See footnote 2
1	 For these purposes, the face value of an award is calculated by multiplying the number of shares over which the award was granted by 40 pence, 
the average closing share price for each of the three business days prior to the date of grant (rounded up to the nearest whole pence).
2	 Each award is subject to performance conditions. The earnings measure will be assessed based on pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA performance in FY26, with the 
share price element of the performance condition assessed following the announcement by the Company of its Full Year Trading Update for its FY26 
financial year (as described further below). To the extent an award vests following the end of the performance period, it is subject to a further two-year 
holding period before the shares are released.
3	 Rosie Fordham’s award was granted in anticipation of her appointment as CFO and accordingly was based on her post-appointment salary.
Further information in relation to the performance conditions for these awards (with half of each award based on earnings (pre-IFRS 16 
EBITDA) and half on share price) is set out on page 113. The Committee believes that the Executive Directors have direct influence over 
both measures, and that targets are stretching but achievable.
Annual report on remuneration continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
60

SAYE Scheme options granted during FY24 – audited information
Gavin Peck and Rosie Fordham were granted SAYE Scheme options on 13 October 2023 as detailed below as part of the SAYE Scheme 
offer made to all eligible colleagues.
Type of award
Number
of shares
Exercise price1
Face value at
grant £2
Gavin Peck
SAYE option
33,125
£0.28
11,448
Rosie Fordham
SAYE option
33,125
£0.28
11,448
1	 In line with the SAYE Scheme, this is set at a 20% discount to 34.56 pence, the average closing share price on 20, 21 and 22 September 2023, the three 
business days prior to the date of invitation.
2	 For these purposes, the face value of the option is calculated by multiplying the number of shares over which the option was granted by 34.56 pence, 
the average closing share price for each of the three business days prior to the date of invitation.
Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests – audited information
The number of shares of the Company in which the Directors had a beneficial interest, together with details of the Executive Directors’ 
long-term incentive interests, as at 5 May 2024, are set out in the table below.
Outstanding scheme interests as at 5 May 2024
Beneficially owned shares
Unvested LTIP
interests
subject to
performance
conditions
Scheme
interests not
subject to
performance
measures 1
Vested but
 unexercised
 scheme
interests 2
Total shares
subject to
outstanding
scheme
interests 3
As at
1 May 2023
As at
5 May 2024 4
Total of all 
scheme
 interests and
shareholdings 
at 5 May 2024 4
Executive Directors
Gavin Peck
2,791,347
64,159
96,151
2,951,657
 
554,636
554,636
3,506,293
Rosie Fordham (appointed 
31 December 2023)
450,000
111,411
—
561,411
N/A
24,691
586,102
Steve Alldridge (resigned 
31 December 2023)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1	 SAYE awards (and restricted share awards (RSAs) held by Rosie Fordham, and granted to her prior to her appointment as CFO) that have not vested.
2	 LTIP awards that have vested but remain unexercised.
3	 The tax qualifying CSOP awards granted as part of the 2019 awards are not included in these numbers, reflecting that if they were to be exercised the LTIP 
element of those awards would be reduced to reflect the gain on the CSOP element, as referred to on page 113. 
4	 Or date of cessation if earlier.
Outstanding scheme interests as at 5 May 2024
Beneficially owned shares
Unvested LTIP
interests
subject to
performance
conditions
Scheme
interests not
subject to
performance
measures
Total shares
subject to
outstanding
scheme
interests
As at
1 May 2023
As at
5 May 2024 1
Total of all 
scheme
 interests and
shareholdings 
at 5 May 2024 1
Non-Executive Directors
Carolyn Bradley (resigned 15 July 2024)
—
—
—
179,736
179,736
178,736
Harry Morley2
—
—
—
275,000
275,000
275,000
Catherine Glickman
—
—
—
181,033
181,033
181,033
John Goold (appointed 14 February 2024)3
—
—
—
N/A
3,754,000
3,754,000
Mark Kirkland (appointed 14 February 2024)3
—
—
—
N/A
3,754,000
3,754,000
1	 Or date of cessation if earlier.
2	 Includes interest of Kate Morley (a person closely associated with Harry Morley).
3	 Shares shown for each of John Goold and Mark Kirkland represent the total shareholding in the Company of Kelso Group Holdings plc (a person closely 
associated with John Goold and Mark Kirkland given their positions as CEO and CFO of Kelso Group Holdings plc respectively). John Goold and Mark 
Kirkland resigned as Directors on 1 October 2024).
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
61
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Executive Directors’ interests under share schemes – audited information
The table below sets out the Executive Directors’ interests in the LTIP and SAYE Schemes.
The LTIP awards are subject to performance conditions as set out in the table below.
Award date
Vesting, exercise 
or release date
As at 
1 May
2023
Granted 
during the
year
Exercised 
during the
year
Lapsed 
during the
year
Number of
shares as at 
5 May 2024
Exercise
price
Gavin Peck
LTIP
3 September 20191,2
September 2022
96,151
—
—
—
96,151
N/A
15 February 2021
June 2023
847,457
—
—
847,457
—
N/A
30 September 20213
N/A
638,297
—
—
—
638,297
N/A
 
17 November 2022
June 2025
936,363
—
—
—
936,363
N/A 
9 October 2023
June 2026
—
1,216,687
—
—
1,216,687
N/A
SAYE
31 August 2021
1 October 2024
16,363
—
—
16,363
—
55p
4 November 2022
1 December 2025
31,034
—
—
—
31,037
29p
 
4 November 2022 
1 December 2025
—
33,125
—
—
33,125
28p
Rosie Fordham
LTIP
9 October 2023
June 2026
—
450,000
—
—
450,000
N/A
RSA4
31 August 2021
31 August 2024
16,949
—
—
—
16,949
N/A
17 November 2022
17 November 2025
30,303
—
—
—
30,303
N/A
SAYE
4 November 2022
1 December 2025
31,034
—
—
—
31,034
29p
4 November 2022 
1 December 2025
—
33,125
—
—
33,125
28p
Steve Alldridge
LTIP
30 September 2021
June 2024
446,808
—
—
446,808
—
N/A
17 November 2022
June 2025
655,454
—
—
655,454
—
N/A
1	 In addition to his LTIP award, Gavin Peck was also granted a tax qualifying CSOP award over 37,037 shares with an exercise price of £0.81. The CSOP 
award vested at 38.4% (the same level as the LTIP award – see Note 2 below) and lapsed in respect of the balance of the shares subject to it so that it is 
not held over 22,815 shares. To the extent a CSOP award is exercised at a gain, the extent to which the associated LTIP award can be exercised shall be 
reduced by the amount of the gain so that there is no increase in the pre-tax value of the award. 
2	 38.4% of Gavin Peck’s LTIP award granted in 2019 vested by reference to EPS performance over the three financial years ending with FY22. The remaining 
portion of the award (154,666) lapsed on the vesting date as shown in the table above. The vested portion of the award will not be released to Gavin so 
that he can exercise it until the end of a further two-year holding period. 
3	 As noted above, the performance condition for this award was not met and the award has lapsed.
4	 Restricted share awards granted to Rosie Fordham prior to her appointment as CFO.
The performance condition applying to Gavin Peck’s LTIP award granted in September 2021 is summarised on page 60. The award has 
lapsed in full. 
Vesting of the LTIP awards made in November 2022 and October 2023 is based on stretching earnings (pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA subject to 
such adjustments as the Remuneration Committee determines to ensure that performance is assessed on a fair and consistent basis) 
and share price targets. The Board is of the view that the pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA targets are commercially sensitive, and will therefore only be 
disclosed retrospectively in the year in which performance and outturn for the specific award is assessed. The structure of performance 
targets and details of the share price measure are set out in the table below. 
Award date
Measure
Weighting
Threshold (20% vesting)
Maximum (100% vesting)
17 November 2022
Pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA
50%
Commercially sensitive
Share price1
50%
£0.43
£1.40
9 October 2023
Pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA
50%
Commercially sensitive
Share price2
50%
£0.50
£1.00
1 	 Average share price over the period of four weeks following the announcement by the Company of its Full Year Trading Update for its 2024/25 financial year.
2 	 Average share price over the period of four weeks following the announcement by the Company of its Full Year Trading Update for its 2025/26 financial year.
The awards are subject to a general performance underpin, whereby the Committee shall assess overall financial performance of the 
Group over the performance period in determining the level of vesting and whether any of the value of the awards on assessment of the 
performance conditions represents a ‘windfall gain’. The awards are also subject to a cap such that the value of the vested shares under 
an award, determined by reference to the price used to assess the share price element of the performance condition, may not exceed 
£2,500,000 (November 2022 award) or £3,750,000 (October 2023 award) in the case of Gavin Peck, and £1,750,000 (October 2023 award) 
in the case of Rosie Fordham.
Annual report on remuneration continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
62

Directors’ share ownership guidelines – audited information
The Committee has adopted a shareholding guideline for the Executive Directors, which requires the Executive Directors to retain half 
of all shares acquired under the LTIP (after sales to cover tax and any exercise price) until such time as their holding has a value equal 
to 200% of salary. Shares subject to LTIP awards which have vested but not been released (i.e. which remain in a holding period), or which 
have been released but have not been exercised, and any shares subject to deferred bonus awards, count towards the guidelines on 
a net of assumed tax basis. 
Executive Director
Number 
of shares
 counting
towards the
guideline at
30 April 2024
Value of 
shares
counting
 towards
the guideline 1
Value of
shares as
a percentage
 of base salary
Shareholding
 guideline met?
Gavin Peck
605,596
£145,343
44.8%
In progress
Rosie Fordham
24,691
£5,925
2.7%
In progress 2
1	 Based on a share price of 24 pence as at 3 May 2024 (being the last trading day prior to the year end of 5 May 2024).
2	 Rosie Fordham has not yet had any LTIP award which has vested. When she does so, retained shares will count towards the shareholding guideline.
Performance graph and historical CEO remuneration outcomes
The graph below shows the total shareholder return (TSR) performance for the Company’s shares in comparison to the FTSE SmallCap for 
the period from Main Market admission on 19 July 2018 to 5 May 2024. The TSR performance of the FTSE SmallCap index has been selected 
as it is considered the most appropriate comparator group. For the purposes of the graph, TSR has been calculated as the percentage 
change in the market price of the shares during the period, assuming that dividends are reinvested. The graph shows the value, as at 
5 May 2024, of £100 invested in shares in the Company on 19 July 2018 compared with £100 invested in the FTSE SmallCap.
The table below sets out the CEO’s total remuneration over the last six financial years, valued using the methodology applied to the single 
total figure of remuneration. The Committee does not believe that the remuneration paid in earlier years as a private company bears any 
comparative value to that paid in its time as a public company and, therefore, the Committee has chosen to disclose remuneration only 
for the six most recent financial years (with the figures for FY19 being for the period from admission on 19 July 2018 to 28 April 2019):
Year (CEO)
Total single
 figure
 remuneration
£000
Annual 
bonus payout 
(% of maximum
 opportunity)
LTIP vesting 
(% of maximum
 number of
 shares)1
2024 (Gavin Peck)
347
0%
0%
2023 (Gavin Peck)
331
0%
0%
2022 (Gavin Peck)
585
78%
38%
2021 (Gavin Peck)
303
0%
0%
2020 (Gavin Peck – from 16 January 2020)
85
0%
N/A 
2020 (Kevin Keaney – until 16 January 2020)
267
0%
N/A 
2019 (Kevin Keaney)
288
0%
N/A 
1	 There was no LTIP capable of vesting in respect of performance ending 2019 and 2020.
July 18
May 24
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
TheWorks.co.uk plc
FTSE SmallCap
Total shareholder return (rebased to £100)
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
63
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Change in remuneration of Directors compared to Group employees
The table below sets out the annual change in salary and fees, benefits and bonus paid to each of the Directors from FY20 to FY24. 
The regulations also require a comparison of the change in the remuneration of the employees of TheWorks.co.uk plc. The Company has 
no employees other than the Executive Directors and, accordingly, strictly no disclosure is required. Given the added complexities of the 
impact in FY21 of furlough, the Company has not included the average employee salary changes between FY21 and FY22, but, in the 
interests of transparency, has provided information on the approach to the change in salary of the Group’s UK employees.
Notes to the table provide additional information in relation to the changes. Additional information in relation to the changes in previous 
years is set out in the relevant previous Directors’ remuneration reports.
Executive Directors
Non-Executive Directors
UK employees’ average4,5
Gavin Peck
Steve Alldridge 1
Carolyn Bradley
Catherine
 Glickman
Harry Morley
Salary/fees
FY23–FY24
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
9.96%
FY22–FY23
3%
3%
0%
3%
3%
3.46%
FY21–FY22
6%
—
—
6%
6%
See note to
corresponding table
in FY22 DRR
FY20–FY21 
27%
—
—
(2%)
(2%)
See note to
corresponding table
in FY22 DRR
Taxable benefits
FY23–FY24
0%
—
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.30%
FY22–FY23
0%
0%
N/A
N/A
N/A
5.5%
FY21–FY22
18% 2
—
—
N/A
N/A
(17.8%)
FY20–FY21
0%
—
—
N/A
N/A
23.49%
Annual bonus
FY23–FY24
N/A 3
N/A 3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FY22–FY23
N/A 3
N/A 3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FY21–FY22
N/A
—
—
N/A
N/A
See note to
corresponding
table in FY22 DRR
FY20–FY21
N/A
—
—
N/A
N/A
(60.4%)
1	 Steve Alldridge resigned as a Director on 31 December 2023. Therefore the percentage change between his FY23 and FY24 remuneration is calculated 
by reference to his annualised remuneration for FY24. Rosie Fordham (who replaced Steve Alldridge as CFO with effect from 31 December 2023) is not 
included in the table as she did not receive remuneration as a Director in FY23, and therefore there any disclosure of percentage change from FY23 to 
FY24 would not be based on comparable data.
2	 Increase reflects increase due to SAYE discount included in taxable benefits.
3	 No annual bonus was earned by Gavin Peck or Steve Alldridge in respect of FY24. Therefore, the percentage change between FY23 and FY24 is not 
considered to be a meaningful disclosure.
4	 The UK employees’ average changes are calculated comparing the remuneration for the tax year ended 5 April 2023 with the remuneration for the tax 
year ended 5 April 2024 as this data is more readily available than data in respect of financial years. The value of SAYE options granted in October 2023 
has been excluded for consistency with the CEO pay ratio calculation on page 65.
5	 In FY23 rates for store and Distribution Centre colleagues were increased in line with increases in the National Living and Minimum Wages, with colleagues 
aged 23 plus receiving an increase of 9.7% in April 2023. Outside of all applicable NMW increases, an average of 6.8% was given across the business (7.6% 
average for store management and 5% average for Store Support and Distribution Centre colleagues). In FY24 rates for store and Distribution Centre 
colleagues were increased in line with NLW and NMW increases, with colleagues aged 23 plus receiving an increase of 9.8% in April 2024. 
Relative importance of spend on pay
The following table sets out the total remuneration for all employees and the total shareholder distributions in FY23 and FY24. All figures 
provided are taken from the relevant Company accounts.
FY23
£000
FY24
£000
Percentage
 change
Total remuneration for all employees (including Executive Directors)
62,235
67,855
9.0%
Dividends and share buyback
1,492
nil
—
Since there were no dividends or buybacks in FY24, the percentage change between FY23 and FY24 is not considered to be 
a meaningful disclosure.
Annual report on remuneration continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
64

CEO pay ratio
The table below shows how the CEO’s remuneration (as taken from the single figure remuneration table and, therefore, taking into 
account the CEO’s voluntary reduction in remuneration in relevant years as disclosed in previous Directors’ remuneration reports) compares 
to equivalent remuneration for full-time equivalent UK employees, ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile.
Pay ratio
Remuneration values 
£
Year
Method
25th percentile 
Median 
75th percentile 
25th percentile 
Median 
75th percentile 
FY24
Option C
16:1
16:1
15:1
Salary only
21,674
21,674
23,234
Total remuneration
21,678
21,856
23,574
FY23
Option C
17:1
16:1
15:1
Salary only
19,760
20,342
21,674
Total remuneration
19,773
20,473
21,997
FY22
Option C
31:1
30:1
27:1
Salary only
18,533
19,115
20,389
Total remuneration
18,637
19,487
21,591
FY21
Option C
17:1
16:1
15:1
Salary only
18,138
18,720
19,448
Total remuneration
18,138
18,720
19,675
FY20
Option C
21:1
19:1
17:1
Salary only
17,077
18,013
19,925
Total remuneration
17,077
18,094
20,338
The methodology applied to calculate pay ratios was as follows:
•	 The regulations set out three methodologies for determining the CEO pay ratio. We have chosen ‘Option C’, consistent with the 
previous years’ calculations.
•	 As ratios could be unduly impacted by joiners and leavers who may not participate in all remuneration arrangements in the year 
of joining and leaving, the Committee has modified the statutory basis to exclude any employee not employed throughout the 
financial year.
•	 Employee pay data is based on full-time equivalent (FTE) base pay for UK employees as at 31 March of the relevant year (based on 
FTE salary for salaried employees and hourly pay rates for hourly paid employees), to which actual pension contributions, bonus and 
benefits have been added, except that the value of SAYE options has been excluded (for the purposes of the FY20, FY22, FY23 and FY24 
calculations) as their value is not considered to have a significant impact on the CEO pay ratios and sourcing the data for each employee is 
administratively burdensome. The employees have then been ranked by FTE pay and benefits calculated on this basis and the employees 
at the 25th percentile, 50th percentile (median) and 75th percentile have been identified. The FTE pay and benefits calculated on this 
basis for those three employees are then compared to the CEO single figure of remuneration to calculate the ratios; the calculations 
do not, therefore, take into account the impact of the identified employees having been furloughed during any year in which that 
was relevant.
•	 For 2020 the CEO single figure of remuneration used comprises the single total figure for FY20 for Kevin Keaney, plus the single total 
figure for Gavin Peck for the period of the year from his appointment as CEO (16 January 2020) to 26 April 2020.
The Company considers that the median pay ratio is consistent with pay, reward and progression policies for the Company’s employees 
as a whole.
Payments to past Directors and for loss of office – audited information
No payments for loss of office or to past Directors were made during FY24.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
65
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Implementation of the Policy 
Information on how the Committee intends to implement the Policy in FY25 is set out below:
Executive Directors
The Executive Directors’ salaries for FY25 are set out below, reflecting the approach to Rosie Fordham’s salary as disclosed in the 
Remuneration Committee Chair’s report on page 58.
Director
FY25
Base salary/
annual fee
£
Gavin Peck
324,450
Rosie Fordham
220,000
The Executive Directors’ maximum bonus for FY25 will be 100% of base salary. 80% will be subject to performance against stretching 
EBITDA targets. The remaining 20% will be subject to performance against key strategic objectives with measurable targets against each 
objective. As targets (both financial and strategic) under the annual bonus are considered commercially sensitive, these will be disclosed 
retrospectively in the FY25 Annual Report.
We currently intend to grant the CEO and CFO an LTIP award in FY25 over shares with values equal to 150% of base salary (for the CEO) 
and 100% of base salary (for the CFO). However, the Committee will be mindful as to any share price movements when taking a final decision 
as to the value of the award which will be granted after this report is published. The awards will be subject to stretching and equally 
weighted earnings and share price performance conditions, and a general performance underpin, in line with previous awards.
Non-Executive Directors
There will no changes to the fees payable to the Chair and Non-Executive Directors in FY25, which are as follows:
Amount 
£
Chair fee
105,000
Non-Executive Director base fee
48,667
Committee Chair fee
5,407
Shareholder voting at AGM
The following table shows the results of the binding vote on the Policy at the 2022 AGM, and the binding vote on amendments to the 
Policy, and advisory vote on the Directors’ remuneration report, at the 2023 AGM.
Approval of the Remuneration Policy
at the 2022 AGM
Approval of the amendments to the 
Remuneration Policy
at the 2023 AGM
Approval of the Directors’ 
remuneration report 
at the 2023 AGM
Total number
 of votes
% of 
votes cast
Total 
number 
of votes
% of 
votes cast
Total 
number 
of votes
% of 
votes cast
For (including discretionary)
31,925,296
99.91
36,055,046
99.81
36,042,214
99.77
Against
27,758
0.09
68,288
0.19
83,288
0.23
Withheld
11,384
N/A
19,899
N/A
17,731
N/A
On behalf of the Board
Catherine Glickman
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
1 October 2024
Annual report on remuneration continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
66

Directors’ report
The Directors present their report for the financial year ended 5 May 2024. Additional information which is incorporated by reference into 
this Directors’ report, including information required in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 (the Act), can be located as follows:
Disclosure
Location
Future business developments
Strategic report – pages 1 to 43
Environmental policy
ESG review – pages 25 to 29
Employee engagement
Our stakeholders – pages 22 and 23
ESG review – pages 25 to 29
Corporate governance report – pages 46 to 51
Section 172 statement
Page 24
Stakeholder engagement in key decisions
Our stakeholders – pages 22 and 23
Section 172 statement – page 24
Corporate governance report – pages 46 to 51
Corporate governance compliance statement
Corporate governance report – pages 46 to 51
Financial risk management objectives and policies 
(including hedging policy and use of financial instruments)
Note 25 to the financial statements – pages 108 to 112
Exposure to price risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and cash flow risk
Note 25 to the financial statements – pages 108 to 112
Details of long-term incentive schemes
Directors’ remuneration report – pages 57 to 66
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
Page 70
Directors
The Directors of the Company who held office throughout the period (and changes since the financial period end) are set out below:
Carolyn Bradley (Chair) (stepped down 15 July 2024)
Steve Bellamy (Chair) (appointed 15 July 2024)
Gavin Peck (CEO) 
Steve Alldridge (CFO) (resigned 31 December 2023)
Rosie Fordham (CFO) (appointed 1 January 2024)
Harry Morley (Senior Independent Director) 
Catherine Glickman (Non-Executive Director)
John Goold (Non-Executive Director) (appointed 14 February 2024, stepped down 1 October 2024)
Mark Kirkland (Non-Executive Director) (appointed 14 February 2024, stepped down 1 October 2024)
Summaries of the current Directors’ key skills and experience are included on pages 44 and 45.
Results and dividend
The results for the year are set out in the consolidated income statement on page 79. The Directors are not proposing a final dividend 
for the period.
Principal activities
The principal activities of the Group are the provision of arts and crafts, stationery, toys, games and books retailing products through 
retail stores and online. The principal activity of the Company is that of a holding company.
Articles of Association
The rules governing the appointment and replacement of Directors are set out in the Company’s Articles. The Articles may be amended 
by a special resolution of the Company’s shareholders. The Articles also set out in full the powers of the Directors in relation to issuing shares 
and buying back the Company’s own shares. 
Share capital
Details of the Company’s share capital, including changes during the year, are set out in Note 36 to the financial statements. As at 
5 May 2024, the Company’s issued share capital consisted of 62,500,000 ordinary shares of 1 pence each. There have been no changes 
to the Company’s issued share capital since the financial period end.
Ordinary shareholders are entitled to receive notice of, and to attend and speak at, any general meeting of the Company. On a show of 
hands every shareholder present in person or by proxy (or being a corporation represented by a duly authorised representative) shall have 
one vote, and on a poll every shareholder who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for every share of which he is the holder. 
The Notice of AGM specifies deadlines for exercising voting rights and appointing a proxy or proxies.
Other than the general provisions of the Articles (and prevailing legislation) there are no specific restrictions of the size of a holding 
or on the transfer of the ordinary shares.
The Directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s shares that may result in the restriction of the transfer 
of securities or on voting rights. No shareholder holds securities carrying any special rights or control over the Company’s share capital.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
67
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Authority for the Company to purchase its own shares
Subject to authorisation by shareholder resolution, the Company may purchase its own shares in accordance with the Act. Any shares 
which have been bought back may be held as treasury shares or cancelled immediately upon completion of the purchase.
At the Company’s AGM held on 4 October 2023, the Company was generally and unconditionally authorised by its shareholders to make 
market purchases (within the meaning of Section 693 of the Act) of up to a maximum of 6,250,000 of its ordinary shares. The Company has 
not repurchased any of its ordinary shares under this authority, which is due to expire at the AGM to be held on 31 October 2024, and 
accordingly has an unexpired authority to purchase up to 6,250,000 ordinary shares with a nominal value of £62,500.00. A resolution 
to renew the authority for a further year will be proposed at the 2024 AGM.
Directors’ interests
The number of ordinary shares of the Company in which the Directors were beneficially interested as at 5 May 2024 is set out in the 
Directors’ remuneration report on page 61.
Directors’ indemnities
The Company’s Articles provide, subject to the provisions of UK legislation, an indemnity for Directors and Officers of the Company 
and the Group in respect of liabilities they may incur in the discharge of their duties or in the exercise of their powers.
Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover is maintained by the Company and is in place in respect of all the Company’s Directors 
at the date of this report. The Company reviews its level of cover on an annual basis.
Compensation for loss of office
The Company does not have any agreements with any Executive Director or employee that would provide compensation for loss of office 
or employment resulting from a takeover except that provisions of the Company’s LTIP and other share schemes may cause options and 
awards outstanding under such schemes to vest on a takeover. Further information is provided in the Directors’ remuneration report on 
page 65.
Significant interests
The table below shows the interests in shares notified to the Company in accordance with the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules as at 5 May 2024 and 27 September 2024 (being the latest practicable date prior to publication of this Annual Report).
As at 5 May 2024
 
As at 27 September 2024
Name of shareholder
Number of ordinary shares 
of 1 pence each held
Percentage of 
total voting rights held
Number of ordinary shares 
of 1 pence each held
Percentage of 
total voting rights held
Schroders plc
12,414,853
19.86%  
12,414,853
19.86%
Hudson Management Limited
6,461,000
10.33%  
9,541,000
15.27%
Graeme Coulthard
4,150,000
6.64%  
4,470,001
7.15%
Kelso Group Holdings plc
3,745,000
5.99%  
3,845,000
6.15%
Mike Burn
—
—
2,845,000
4.55%
Downing LLP
2,800,000
4.48%  
—
Below 3%
Joanne Barraclough
1,905,582
3.05%
1,905,582
3.05%
Branches outside the UK
Other than ten stores located in the Republic of Ireland, the Company has no branches outside the UK.
Employee involvement
Information relating to employees of the Group and how the Company engages with its workforce can be found on pages 22 and 26.
Disabled employees
It is the policy of the Group to provide equal recruitment and other opportunities for all colleagues regardless of sex, age, religion, 
race, disability or sexual orientation. The Group gives full consideration to applications for employment from disabled people, where they 
adequately fulfil the requirements of the job. Once employed by the Group, we ensure that disabled colleagues have full access to 
training and career development opportunities. Where colleagues become disabled, it is the Group’s policy to provide continuing 
employment and retraining where practicable.
Political donations
The Company did not make any political donations during the year.
Directors’ report continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
68

Change of control – significant agreements
There are a number of agreements that may take effect after, or terminate upon, a change of control of the Company, such as commercial 
contracts, bank loan agreements and property lease arrangements.
The only significant agreement to which the Company is a party that takes effect, alters or terminates upon a change of control of the 
Company following a takeover bid, and the effect thereof, is the Company’s committed bank facility dated 10 June 2022 which contains 
a provision such that, in the event of a change of control, the facility may be cancelled and all outstanding amounts, together with 
accrued interest, will become repayable on the date falling 30 days following written notice being given by the lenders that the facility 
has been cancelled.
Going concern
The Board continues to have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operation for at least 
the next 12 months and that the going concern basis of accounting remains appropriate.
More information in respect of going concern, including the factors considered in reaching this conclusion, is provided in Note 1(b)(i) to the 
consolidated financial statements on pages 84 to 86.
Audit information
Each of the Directors at the date of the approval of this report confirms that:
•	 So far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware.
•	 The Director has taken all the reasonable steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any 
relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditor is aware of the information.
The confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the Act.
Auditor
Following the Company’s move from the premium segment of the London Stock Exchange’s Main Market to AIM, the Board appointed 
Kreston Reeves LLP as auditor for the period ended 5 May 2024. Kreston Reeves LLP has indicated its willingness to continue in office 
and a resolution seeking to reappoint it will be proposed at the forthcoming AGM. 
Annual General Meeting
The AGM will be held on 31 October 2024. The Notice of AGM is contained in a separate letter from the Chair accompanying this report.
Post-balance sheet events
There have been no material post-balance sheet events involving the Company or any of the Company’s subsidiaries as at the date 
of this report.
The Strategic report on pages 1 and 43 and this Directors’ report have been drawn up and presented in accordance with, and in reliance 
upon, applicable English company law and any liability of the Directors in connection with these reports shall be subject to the limitations 
and restrictions provided by such law.
By order of the Board
Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
1 October 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
69
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group and Parent Company financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations. 
Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and Parent Company financial statements for each financial year. Under that law, 
they are required to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards and 
applicable law and have elected to prepare the Parent Company financial statements in accordance with UK accounting standards 
and applicable law, including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework.
Under company law, the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of the Group’s profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the 
Group and Parent Company financial statements, the Directors are required to:
•	 select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
•	 make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant, reliable and prudent;
•	 for the Group financial statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International 
Accounting Standards;
•	 for the Parent Company annual statements, state whether applicable UK accounting standards have been followed, subject 
to any material departures disclosed and explained in the Parent Company financial statements;
•	 assess the Group and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going 
concern; and
•	 use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Parent Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Parent Company and enable them to ensure 
that its financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are responsible for such internal control as they determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, 
and have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to 
prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities. 
Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also responsible for preparing a strategic report, directors’ report, directors’ 
remuneration report and corporate governance statement that complies with that law and those regulations. 
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in 
other jurisdictions. 
Responsibility statement of the Directors in respect of the Annual Financial Report
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:
•	 the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as 
a whole; and
•	 the Strategic report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the issuer and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.
We consider that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and performance, business model and strategy.
By order of the Board
Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
1 October 2024
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
70

Opinion 
We have audited the financial statements of TheWorks.co.uk plc 
(the Parent Company) and its subsidiaries (the Group) for the 
53-week period ended 5 May 2024 which comprise the consolidated 
income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income, consolidated and Company statements of financial 
position, consolidated and Company statements of changes 
in equity, consolidated cash flow statement and notes to the 
financial statements, including a summary of significant Group 
accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has 
been applied in its preparation of the Group financial statements 
is applicable law and UK-adopted International Accounting 
Standards. The financial reporting framework that has been 
applied in the preparation of the Parent Company financial 
statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting 
Standards, including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework 
(United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).
In our opinion:
•	 The financial statements give a true and fair view of the 
state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 
5 May 2024 and of the Group’s profit for the period then ended.
•	 The Group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International 
Accounting Standards. 
•	 The Parent Company financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice.
•	 	The financial statements have been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International 
Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the 
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
section of our report. We are independent of the Group in accordance 
with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the 
financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard 
as applied to listed entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical 
responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We believe 
that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and 
appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that 
the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in 
the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. 
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified 
any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, 
individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the 
Group’s or the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern for a period of at least 12 months from when the financial 
statements are authorised for issue.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with 
respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections 
of this report.
An overview of the scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality 
and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial 
statements. In particular, we looked at where the Directors made 
subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant 
accounting estimates that involved making assumptions and 
considering future events that are inherently uncertain. 
As in all of our audits we also addressed the risk of management 
override of internal controls, including evaluating whether there 
was evidence of bias by the Directors that represented a risk of 
material misstatement due to fraud.
Our application of materiality
Group financial statements
Parent Company 
financial statements
Materiality
£2,119,300 
(FY23: £2,100,700)
£554,100 (FY23: £575,700)
Basis for 
determining 
materiality
0.75% of revenue
1.5% of gross assets
Rationale for 
benchmark 
applied
Revenue is one of the 
primary key performance 
indicators used by 
management. It uses 
this metric to assess 
the business’ overall cash 
generating performance. 
We note that this figure 
is prominent in financial 
statement reporting and 
market announcements 
which further underlines 
its perceived importance 
to users of the 
financial statements.
Gross assets is one of the 
primary benchmarks users 
of the Parent Company 
accounts will consider. 
This is as the Company 
has no trade and is a 
holding company for the 
Group. The key balance 
held by the Company 
is the subsidiary 
investment in The Works 
Investments Limited.
Performance 
materiality 
£1,483,500 
(FY23: £1,470,400)
£387,900 (FY23: £402,900)
Basis for 
determining 
performance 
materiality
70% of materiality
70% of materiality
Rationale for 
performance 
materiality 
applied
Having captured base 
risk from an increased 
number of users in the 
calculation of materiality 
a performance 
materiality of 70% has 
been applied. This is to 
account for the higher 
level of audit risk in place 
due to factors including: 
highly material accounting 
estimates with respect 
to inventory and lease 
accounting, increased 
going concern risk given 
the industry in which the 
business operates and 
increased fraud risk due 
to significant numbers 
of cash transactions.
Having captured base risk 
from an increased number 
of users in the calculation of 
materiality a performance 
materiality of 70% has 
been applied. This is to 
account for the higher 
level of audit risk in place 
due to factors including: 
highly material accounting 
estimates with respect 
to subsidiary investment 
valuation and increased 
going concern risk 
given the industry in 
which the underlying 
business operates.
Triviality 
threshold 
£106,000 
(FY23: £105,000)
£27,700 (FY23: £28,800)
Basis for 
determining 
triviality 
threshold
5% of materiality 
5% of materiality
We reported all audit differences found in excess of our triviality 
threshold to the Directors and the management Board.
Independent auditor’s report
To the shareholders of TheWorks.co.uk plc
For the 53-week period ended 5 May 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
71
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Independent auditor’s report continued
To the shareholders of TheWorks.co.uk plc
For the 53-week period ended 5 May 2024
Our application of materiality continued
For each Group company within the scope of our Group audit, 
we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall Group 
materiality. The range of materiality allocated across each Group 
company was between £2,013,335 and £573,000. The scope of our 
audit was influenced by our application of materiality as we set 
certain quantitative thresholds for performance materiality and use 
these thresholds as a consideration tool to help to determine the 
scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of our audit 
procedures on the individual financial statement line items and 
disclosures and in evaluating the effect of misstatements, both 
individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as 
a whole.
As the primary trading subsidiary we determined component 
materiality for The Works Stores Limited, also based on revenue 
as a benchmark, to be capped at below Group materiality. For the 
non-trading entities in the Group, between 1.5% and 4% of those 
subsidiaries’ gross assets were used. Performance materiality was 
set in the range of 70–80% of each individual materiality. 
Coverage overview
Group 
revenue 
£000
Group profit
 before tax 
£000
Group 
net assets 
£000
Totals at 5 May 2024
£282,585
£7,741
£10,796
Full statutory audit
£282,585 
(100%)
£7,741 
(100%)
£10,750
 (99.6%)
Limited procedures
£nil
£nil
£46
(0.4%)
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed 
sufficient work to be able to give an opinion on the financial 
statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the 
Group and the Parent Company, the accounting processes and 
controls, and the industry in which they operate.
Our scoping considerations for the Group audit were based 
both on financial information and risk. As noted above, limited 
assurance audit work – which is to say the audit of balances and 
transactions material at a Group level – was only applied in 
respect of a small element of the Group. The below table 
summarises for the Parent Company, and its subsidiaries, 
in terms of the level of assurance gained:
Group component
Level of assurance
TheWorks.co.uk plc
Full statutory audit 
(Kreston Reeves)
The Works Investments Limited
Full statutory audit 
(Kreston Reeves)
The Works Stores Limited
Full statutory audit 
(Kreston Reeves)
The Works Online Limited (Dormant)
Limited assurance 
(Kreston Reeves)
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional 
judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include the most significant 
assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to 
fraud) that we identified, including those which had the greatest 
effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in 
the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These 
matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial 
statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we 
do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. This is not a 
complete list of all risks identified by our audit.
Revenue recognition (£000): £282,585 (FY23: £280,102)
Significance and nature of key risk
How our audit addressed the key risk
Revenue is a key performance indicator 
for users in assessing the Group’s financial 
statements. Revenue generated has a 
significant impact on cash inflows and profit 
before tax for the Group. As such, revenue 
is a key determinant in profitability and the 
Group’s ability to generate cash.
Revenue comprises two key revenue streams: 
in-store sales and online sales.
Revenue is recognised at the point of 
completing the physical sale in stores, 
and when the goods have been delivered 
to the customer in the case of online 
sales. These are the points when IFRS 15 
‘performance obligations’ are deemed 
to have been satisfied.
For in-store sales a sample of days was selected for a sample of store locations across 
the period. For each day selected the cashing up process for daily sales was traced 
through to the Aptos reconciliation module. All identified discrepancies were confirmed as 
investigated in line with the Company’s policies. The cash takings for the day were agreed 
to banked amounts the following day. Closing day till float amounts were agreed to the 
approved amount for that till. Credit card takings for the day were agreed to the third-party 
credit card transaction report and amounts banked. Other consideration used such as 
loyalty points and shopping vouchers were also corroborated to appropriate audit 
evidence. The total day’s takings for the store were agreed into the monthly revenue 
journal posting into the accounting system.
For online sales a sample was selected from across the period from online sales reporting. 
In each case this sales transaction was agreed to invoice and delivery date confirmation. 
The monthly online sales list was then agreed to the monthly revenue journal posting into 
the accounting system. 
Gross profit analysis was performed to identify the strongest and weakest performing 
store locations with management providing explanations for these which we took into 
consideration in selecting our sales samples.
Walkthrough testing was performed to ensure that key systems and controls in place 
around the revenue cycle operated as designed.
The accuracy of revenue disclosures in the accounts was confirmed to be consistent 
with the revenue cycle observed and audited. The completeness of these disclosures 
was confirmed by reference to the full disclosure requirements as detailed in IFRS 15.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
We have no concerns over the material accuracy of revenue recognised in the financial statements.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
72

Key audit matters continued
Valuation, existence and impairment of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets (£000): £70,061 (FY23: £77,145)
Significance and nature of key risk
How our audit addressed the key risk
Given the nature of the business there are 
substantial assets and liabilities recognised 
with respect to store leases. As such the 
associated IFRS 16 and impairment accounting 
over these has a highly material impact on the 
financial statements each period. The property, 
plant and equipment held across the business 
are also highly material and as such carry 
increased risk of material misstatement.
The Group estimates the recoverable 
amount of property, plant and equipment 
and right-of-use assets based on their value 
in use, derived from a discounted cash flow 
model prepared by management. The key 
assumptions applied by management are 
short-term sales growth, profit margin and 
discount rates, which all involve a high 
degree of estimation uncertainty.
The increased economic uncertainty and the 
cost-of-living crisis in the UK have increased 
the risk in relation to the recoverability of store 
assets at the cash generating unit (CGU) level, 
each store being a CGU.
For right of use assets we obtained the IFRS 16 calculations and selected a sample of 
existing, additional and disposed of store leases in the period and agreed the key inputs 
into the model back to the terms of the signed lease agreements. We also made use of 
two valuation experts in assessing the reasonableness of the discount rate applied across 
the portfolio of stores. This gave us assurance over the material accuracy of the underlying 
IFRS 16 accounting applied before the impairment model was included.
With respect to the IFRS 16 impairment model we ensured that the variables included 
reconciled back to the audited IFRS 16 accounting schedules. We then selected a sample 
of stores that carried a higher risk of impairment and investigated those stores that were 
not already fully impaired within the model. These investigations included enquiries of 
management and the auditing of the individual discount cash flows for each store. We 
gained significant assurance with respect to the key assumptions feeding into the discount 
cash flows from our auditing of the completeness and accuracy of forecasting as part of 
our going concern review discussed further down in this report. 
For property, plant and equipment we selected a sample across multiple store locations 
and confirmed the cost value and date of capitalisation to appropriate audit evidence. 
For impairment considerations we confirmed the physical existence and good working 
order of the individual asset when practical to do so. We also performed a sense check 
to ensure that the item was appropriate to capitalise under IAS 16. The useful economic 
lives applied to each asset class were considered for reasonableness and these were 
recalculated over the whole asset balance to ensure no material misstatement in the 
application of the depreciation charge.
We also considered impairment at an asset class level by considering key indicators 
of impairment as per IAS 16 and IAS 36 and assessing these against the business.
We ensured for a sample of assets disposed of in the period that appropriate disposal 
accounting was applied.
Walkthrough testing was performed to ensure that key systems and controls in place 
around PPE and RoU assets operated as designed.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
We have no concerns over the material accuracy of property, plant and equipment and right of use assets recognised in the financial 
statements. We draw attention to Note 15 of these financial statements that details the prior period adjustments recognised with respect 
to the amendments to IFRS 16 accounting following on from the audit process. We have audited the accounting with respect to these 
adjustments and have concluded that these are free of material misstatement. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
73
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Independent auditor’s report continued
To the shareholders of TheWorks.co.uk plc
For the 53-week period ended 5 May 2024
Key audit matters continued
Valuation, existence and impairment of inventory (£000): £31,354 (FY23: £33,441)
Significance and nature of key risk
How our audit addressed the key risk
Given the nature of the business there are 
substantial inventory balances recognised, 
including substantial impairment provisions 
held against inventory with respect to both 
the shrinkage provision and the obsolescence 
provision. As such inventory accounting and 
the highly judgemental associated provision 
accounting have a highly material impact 
on the financial statements each period.
Inventories comprise stocks of finished goods 
for resale and are valued on a weighted 
average cost basis and carried at the lower 
of cost and net realisable value.
The Group makes provisions in relation to 
inventory quantities, due to potential stock 
losses not yet reflected in the accounting 
records, commonly referred to as unrecognised 
shrinkage. Additionally, the Group makes 
provisions in relation to individual stock values, 
where the net realisable value of an item is 
expected to be lower than its cost, due 
to obsolescence.
To confirm completeness and existence within the inventory records we visited a sample 
of stores across the portfolio and performed independent checks of stock items from floor 
to sheet (completeness) and from sheet to floor (existence). During a number of these visits 
we also observed local and regional store management conduct its own stock counting 
process which we evaluated the effectiveness of. Finally, we obtained and reviewed 
roll-back analysis from the date of these site visits to the period-end inventory balance.
For valuation testing we selected a sample of stock lines and confirmed the cost value 
applied to appropriate audit evidence, including the treatment of FX, duties and transport 
costs. We further ensured that the net realisable value of stock was in excess of stated 
cost price.
For the provisions applied we first gained an understanding of the accounting policy 
to be applied. We then considered this for reasonableness, including comparison to 
industry peers. We then ensured the mechanical accuracy of the impairment calculations 
to ensure that these are in line with the accounting policy. We finally performed completeness 
testing, reviewing for stock lines not provided for that should be as per the accounting 
policies established.
Specific cut-off testing was undertaken to ensure that inventory was being recorded 
within the appropriate period based on goods received and delivery noted.
Walkthrough testing was performed to ensure that key systems and controls in place 
around inventory operated as designed.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
We have no concerns over the material accuracy of inventory recognised in the financial statements.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
74

Emphasis of matter over going concern
We draw attention to the significant audit risk which describes the uncertainty related to the going concern. We consider this area 
fundamental to the users, understanding of the financial statements. Our opinion is not modified in respect of this matter. 
The appropriateness of preparing the financial statements on the going concern basis
Significance and nature of key risk
How our audit addressed the key risk
We draw attention to Note 1(b)(i) in the 
financial statements, which indicates that 
the business is operating in a low-margin 
environment with many potential risks that 
could adversely impact on going concern. This 
is particularly the case for the financial period 
end, when net cash at bank is diminished in 
comparison to the previous financial period 
end – decreasing from £10.2m to £1.6m. The 
note also highlights that such risk to going 
concern is heightened in a period when 
consumer spending is being dampened by 
challenging economic conditions for the UK. 
This has been magnified by cost pressures, 
including significant increases in the National 
Minimum Wage.
Despite these challenges the Directors believe 
that the Group remains a going concern.
We have obtained and assessed management’s formal going concern assessment 
and focused on the key justifications provided in reaching its conclusions.
We have considered the systems and controls environment in place for management 
to build accurate forecasting models and to appropriately monitor cash on hand and its 
working capital requirements. 
We have analysed the financial performance of the business in the period in comparison 
to recent trading periods as well as analysing the financial position of the business at the 
period end to assess for trends in key liquidity metrics.
We have reviewed the forecasting prepared for the business over the FY25 to FY27 period 
to assess this for potential risk to going concern.
In order to place reliance on this forecasting as audit evidence we have audited key 
assumptions that feed into the model to consider these for reasonableness. This has 
included robust challenge of management where we have reached a differing assessment. 
Our own assessment is based on a combination of actual performance in FY24 and other 
recent financial periods, actual trading for the early part of FY25 and our own conservative 
assumptions with respect to cost pressures and consumer demand.
We have then stress tested the forecasting models in order to assess headroom based 
on management’s Base Case, plausible downside and our own adjusted model which 
includes further adverse conditions.
We have performed monthly analysis over the business’ net cash and capacity for 
borrowing against the revolving credit facility for the FY22 to FY24 period. This has then 
been used as a point of comparison for management’s expectations over the FY25 to 
FY27 forecast period and we have challenged management on perceived inconsistency 
in net cash and facility headroom development over the forecast period.
We have reviewed the revolving capital facility agreement, including reviewing the covenant 
compliance analysis prepared by management, in order to consider the headroom in this. 
We have made our own estimates over covenant compliance under our own adjusted model.
We have considered further factors including assessing the availability of equity and debt 
funding options as well as considering many recently produced economic and trade 
reports over expectations in the retail sector. 
We have cross-checked to audit conclusions in other areas of our file that could adversely 
impact on going concern including consideration of potential unrecorded liabilities and 
other litigation.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
Following the performance of these procedures we consider that there is sufficient evidence to conclude that the going concern basis 
remains the most appropriate basis for the preparation of the financial statements. In particular the availability of a £20m revolving credit 
facility to the business, next renewable in November 2026, is considered sufficient to allow the business to manage its working capital 
requirements over the annual business cycle. However, there are a number of trends that should be closely observed that we have raised; 
these include:
•	 The declining gross and operating margin within the business seen over recent financial periods – we note that management is 
confident of improvement in this area into FY25 and we concur that it has credible grounds for expecting this based on the positive 
trend into Q1 of FY25.
•	 The declining cash levels within the business – we note that management is focused on increasing liquidity over the forecast period 
as detailed within the going concern accounting policy. We also note there being a somewhat false point of comparison to FY22 when 
observing this fall in cash as cash balances in FY22 were artificially inflated by the impact of COVID-19 policies, including the suspension 
of business rates and rent concessions across much of the store portfolio. We further note that the business is in the process of 
significantly improving its stock management processes which, if successful, will lead to significantly reduced lock-up of cash in stock.
•	 Labour cost pressures incurred in the financial period from the meaningful increase in the National Minimum Wage that will carry into 
FY25 and potentially be bolstered by further increases included in future government legislation – we note that management’s 
forecasting includes assumptions around continued labour cost pressures.
•	 The general economic outlook in the UK at present does not suggest that the cost-of-living pressures will substantially ease in the near 
term, which will potentially mean continued weaker footfall on the high street and reduced consumer spending generally – we note that 
the market position as a customer value focused retailer will hopefully continue to protect the business from some of these adverse 
economic headwinds.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
75
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Independent auditor’s report continued
To the shareholders of TheWorks.co.uk plc
For the 53-week period ended 5 May 2024
Other information
The other information comprises the information included in 
the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our 
Auditor’s report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other 
information contained within the Annual Report. Our opinion on the 
financial statements does not cover the other information and, except 
to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not 
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. Our responsibility 
is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether 
the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial 
statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit, 
or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such 
material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we 
are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material 
misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on 
the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material 
misstatement of this other information, we are required to report 
that fact. 
We have nothing to report in this regard.
Our opinion on the Remuneration report 
Kreston Reeves has audited the Remuneration report set out on 
pages 57 to 66 of the Annual Report for the period ended 5 May 2024. 
The Directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation 
and presentation of the Remuneration report in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006. Kreston Reeves’ responsibility is to express an 
opinion on the Remuneration report, based on our audit conducted 
in accordance with International Accounting Standards. In Kreston 
Reeves’ opinion, the Remuneration report of the Group for the period 
complies with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
Our consideration of climate change related risks
The financial impacts on the Group of climate change and the 
transition to a low-carbon economy were considered in our audit 
where they have the potential to directly or indirectly impact key 
judgements and estimates within the financial statements. 
The Group continues to develop its assessment of the potential 
impacts of climate change. Climate risks have the potential to 
materially impact the key judgements and estimates within the 
financial report. Our audit considered those risks that could be 
material to the key judgements and estimates in the assessment 
of the carrying value of non-current assets and closure and 
rehabilitation provisions. 
The key judgements and estimates included in the financial 
statements incorporate actions and strategies, to the extent they 
have been approved and can be reliably estimated in accordance 
with the Group’s accounting policies. Accordingly, our key audit 
matters address how we have assessed the Group’s climate-related 
assumptions to the extent they impact each key audit matter. 
Our audit procedures were performed with the involvement of 
our climate change and valuation specialists.
Opinions on other matters prescribed by the 
Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course 
of the audit:
•	 The information given in the Strategic report and the Directors’ 
report for the financial year for which the financial statements 
are prepared is consistent with the financial statements.
•	 The Strategic report and the Directors’ report have been 
prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
Matters on which we are required to report 
by exception
In light of our knowledge and understanding of the Group and 
Parent Company and its environment obtained in the course of 
the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the 
Strategic report or the Directors’ report.
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in 
relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to 
you if, in our opinion:
•	 Adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent 
Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 
received from branches not visited by us.
•	 The Parent Company financial statements are not in agreement 
with the accounting records and returns.
•	 Certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law 
are not made.
•	 We have not received all the information and explanations we 
require for our audit.
Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement 
(set out on page 70), the Directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give 
a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the Directors 
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether 
due to fraud or error. 
In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible 
for assessing the Group’s and Parent Company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to 
going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting 
unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or Parent 
Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative 
but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about 
whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to 
issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable 
assurance is a high level of assurance but is not a guarantee that 
an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect 
a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise 
from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in 
the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence 
the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these 
financial statements. 
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance 
with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our 
responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements 
in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our 
procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud, 
is detailed below.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
76

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements continued
Capability of the audit in detecting irregularities, including fraud
Based on our understanding of the Group and industry, and 
through discussion with the Directors and other management 
(as required by auditing standards), we identified that the principal 
risks of non-compliance with laws and regulations related to health 
and safety, anti-bribery and employment law. We considered the 
extent to which non-compliance might have a material effect on the 
financial statements. We also considered those laws and regulations 
that have a direct impact on the preparation of the financial 
statements such as the Companies Act 2006. We communicated 
identified laws and regulations throughout our team and remained 
alert to any indications of non-compliance throughout the audit. 
We evaluated management’s incentives and opportunities for 
fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including the 
risk of override of controls), and determined that the principal risks 
were related to: posting inappropriate journal entries to increase 
revenue or reduce expenditure, management bias in accounting 
estimates and judgemental areas of the financial statements such 
as the IFRS 16 and inventory provisions. Audit procedures performed 
by the Group engagement team included:
•	 We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory 
frameworks that are applicable to the Group and determined 
that the most significant are those that relate to the reporting 
framework, the relevant tax compliance regulations and 
employment law in the jurisdictions in which TheWorks.co.uk plc 
operates. In addition, we concluded that there are certain 
significant laws and regulations that may have an effect on the 
determination of the amounts and disclosures in the financial 
statements, mainly relating to health and safety, employee 
matters, bribery and corruption practices.
•	 	Detailed discussions were held with management to identify any 
known or suspected instances of non-compliance with laws and 
regulations; this included a review of accident report logs 
covering the financial period.
•	 	Identifying and assessing the design effectiveness of controls 
that management has in place to prevent and detect fraud with 
respect to key business cycles; this includes revenue, expenses/
purchases, inventory and IFRS 16 accounting.
•	 	Challenging assumptions and judgements made by management 
in its significant accounting estimates, including assessing the 
capabilities of the management experts appointed to provide 
discount rate figures for impairment models; these models were 
calculated and the data and assumptions they have used to 
calculate these assessed by our own auditor’s expert.
•	 	Performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or 
unexpected relationships, including related party transactions, 
that may indicate risks of material misstatement due to fraud.
•	 	Reading minutes of meetings of those charged with 
governance and reviewing correspondence with relevant 
tax and regulatory authorities.
•	 	Performing integrity testing to verify the legitimacy of banking 
records obtained from management.
•	 	Review of significant and unusual transactions and evaluation 
of the underlying financial rationale supporting the transactions, 
specifically with a focus on cut-off accounting in key areas of the 
financial statements.
•	 	Identifying and testing journal entries with the use of data 
analytics in order to focus on journals carrying increased 
indicators of potential fraud.
•	 	Identifying and testing additional journal entries through manual 
assessment of specific fraud risk indicators relevant to the Group, 
including the interaction between the inventory and cost of sales 
ledgers to ensure that inventory cost is being appropriately 
transferred into cost of sales at the point of sale.
Because of the inherent limitations of an audit, there is a risk 
that we will not detect all irregularities, including those leading 
to a material misstatement in the financial statements or 
non‑compliance with regulation. This risk increases the more 
that compliance with a law or regulation is removed from the 
events and transactions reflected in the financial statements, 
as we will be less likely to become aware of instances of 
non‑compliance.
As part of an audit in accordance with ISAs (UK), we exercise 
professional judgement and maintain professional scepticism 
throughout the audit. We also:
•	 Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the 
financial statements, whether due to fraud or error, design and 
perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain 
audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide 
a basis for our opinion. The risk of not detecting a material 
misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting 
from error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional 
omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal control.
•	 	Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit 
in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the 
circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion 
on the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control.
•	 	Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used 
and the reasonableness of accounting estimates and related 
disclosures made by the Directors.
•	 	Conclude on the appropriateness of the Directors’ use of the 
going concern basis of accounting and, based on the audit 
evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related 
to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the 
Group’s or the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are 
required to draw attention in our Auditor’s report to the related 
disclosures in the financial statements or, if such disclosures are 
inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based 
on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of our Auditor’s 
report. However, future events or conditions may cause the 
Group or the Parent Company to cease to continue as a 
going concern.
•	 	Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the 
financial statements, including the disclosures, and whether the 
financial statements represent the underlying transactions and 
events in a manner that achieves fair presentation.
•	 	Obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the 
financial information of the entities or business activities within 
the Group to express an opinion on the consolidated financial 
statements. We are responsible for the direction, supervision and 
performance of the Group audit. We remain solely responsible 
for our audit opinion.
We communicate with those charged with governance regarding, 
among other matters, the planned scope and timing of the audit 
and significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies 
in internal control that we identify during our audit.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
77
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

Other matters which we are required to address
We were appointed by the Audit Committee in the period to 
audit the financial statements. Our total uninterrupted period of 
engagement is one period, covering the period ended 5 May 2024.
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard 
were not provided to the Group or the Parent Company and we 
remain independent of the Group and the Parent Company in 
conducting our audit.
During the period under review, agreed upon procedures were 
completed in respect of a number of the Group’s service 
charge accounts.
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the 
Audit Committee.
Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, 
in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to 
the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to 
them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest 
extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility 
to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members 
as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we 
have formed.
Anne Dwyer BSc (Hons) FCA (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of 
Kreston Reeves LLP	
Chartered Accountants
Statutory Auditor
London
1 October 2024
Independent auditor’s report continued
To the shareholders of TheWorks.co.uk plc
For the 53-week period ended 5 May 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
78

53 weeks to 5 May 2024
52 weeks to 30 April 2023 
(Restated – Note 15)
Note
Result before
 Adjusting items
£000
Adjusting
items
£000
Total
£000
Result before
 Adjusting items
£000
Adjusting
items 1
£000
Total
£000
Revenue
3
282,585
—
282,585
280,102
—
280,102
Cost of sales
5
(234,505)
3,741
(230,764)
(235,867)
3,628 
(232,239) 
Gross profit
48,080
3,741
51,821
44,235
3,628
47,863
Other operating income
8
—
8
8
—
8
Distribution expenses
(12,725)
—
(12,725)
(10,284)
—
(10,284)
Administrative expenses
(27,685)
—
(27,685)
(24,197)
—
(24,197)
Operating profit
6
7,678
3,741 
11,419
9,762
3,628
13,390
Finance income
19
—
19
227
—
227
Finance expenses
(4,520)
—
(4,520)
(4,648)
—
(4,648)
Net financing expense
8
(4,501)
—
(4,501)
(4,421)
—
(4,421)
Profit before tax
3,177
3,741
6,918
5,341
3,628
8,969
Taxation
9
(541)
—
(541)
395
—
395
Profit for the period
2,636
3,741
6,377
5,736
3,628
9,364
Alternative performance measures
Profit before tax and IFRS 16 
4
1,118
(1,022)
96
3,603
(1,488)
2,115
Basic earnings per share (pence)
11
4.2
10.2
9.2
15.0
Diluted earnings per share (pence)
11
4.2
10.2
9.1
14.8
1	
Profit on disposal of right-of-use assets and lease liability recognised under IFRS 16 has been restated in the prior period to be shown as an Adjusting item 
rather than in result before Adjusting items.
Accompanying notes that form part of these financial statements are on pages 84 to 114.
Profit for the period is attributable to equity holders of the Parent. 
Consolidated income statement
For the period ended 5 May 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
79
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated –
Note 15)
£000
Profit for the period
6,377
9,364
Items that may be recycled subsequently into profit and loss
Cash flow hedges – changes in fair value
1,664
(2,861)
Cash flow hedges – reclassified to profit and loss
134
(62)
Cost of hedging – changes in fair value
(415)
(162)
Cost of hedging – reclassified to profit and loss
182
91
Tax relating to components of other comprehensive income
(323)
262
Other comprehensive income/(expense) for the period, net of income tax
1,242
(2,732)
Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to equity shareholders of the Parent
7,619
6,632
Accompanying notes that form part of these financial statements are on pages 84 to 114.
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the period ended 5 May 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
80

 
Note
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated –
Note 15)
£000
Non-current assets
 
 
Intangible assets
12
1,866 
916
Property, plant and equipment
13
12,358 
11,773 
Right-of-use assets
14
57,703
65,372 
Deferred tax assets
16
4,036 
4,844 
 
75,963 
82,905 
Current assets
Inventories
17
31,354 
33,441
Trade and other receivables
18
8,384 
7,507
Derivative financial assets
25
306 
—
Current tax asset
9
1,189 
1,149 
Cash and cash equivalents
19
1,619 
10,196 
 
42,852 
52,293 
Total assets
118,815 
135,198 
Current liabilities
 
 
Lease liabilities
14, 20
19,943 
19,626
Trade and other payables
21
29,886 
34,479
Provisions
22
543 
565
Derivative financial liabilities
25
64 
1,048
 
50,436
55,718
Non-current liabilities
Lease liabilities
14, 20
57,817 
74,766
Provisions
22
476 
1,298
 
58,293 
76,064
Total liabilities
108,729 
131,782
Net assets
10,086
3,416 
Equity attributable to equity holders of the Parent
 
 
Share capital
24
625 
625 
Share premium
24
28,322 
28,322 
Merger reserve
(54)
(54)
Share-based payment reserve
2,583 
2,780 
Hedging reserve
129 
(331)
Retained earnings
(21,519)
(27,926)
Total equity
10,086 
3,416 
Accompanying notes that form part of these financial statements are on pages 84 to 114.
These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 1 October 2024 and were signed on its behalf by:
Rosie Fordham
Chief Financial Officer
Company registered number: 11325534
Consolidated statement of financial position
As at 5 May 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
81
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

 
Attributable to equity holders of the Company
 
Share
capital
£000
Share
premium
£000
Merger
reserve
£000
Share-based
payment
reserve
£000
Hedging
reserve 1,2
£000
Retained
earnings
£000
Total
equity
£000
Reported balance at 1 May 2022
625
28,322
(54)
2,252
2,227
(32,994)
378
Cumulative adjustment to opening balance (Note 15)
—
—
—
—
—
(2,332)
(2,332)
Restated balance at 1 May 2022 (Note 15)
625
28,322
(54)
2,252
2,227
(35,326)
(1,954)
Total comprehensive income for the period
Profit for the period (Restated – Note 15)
—
—
—
—
—
9,364
9,364
Other comprehensive expense
—
—
—
—
(2,732)
—
(2,732)
Total comprehensive(expense)/income for the period
—
—
—
—
(2,732)
9,364
6,632
Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging 
transferred to the cost of inventory (Note 25)
—
—
—
—
174
—
174
Transactions with owners of the Company
Share-based payment charges
—
—
—
528
—
—
528
Dividend
—
—
—
—
—
(1,492)
(1,492)
Own shares purchased by Employee Benefit Trust
—
—
—
—
—
(472)
(472)
Total transactions with owners of the Company
—
—
—
528
—
(1,964)
(1,436)
Balance at 30 April 2023 (Restated – Note 15)
625
28,322
(54)
2,780
(331)
(27,926)
3,416
Total comprehensive income for the period
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Profit for the period
—
—
—
—
—
6,377
6,377
Other comprehensive income
—
—
—
—
1,242
—
1,242
Total comprehensive income for the period
—
—
—
—
1,242
6,377
7,619
Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging 
transferred to the cost of inventory (Note 25)
—
—
—
—
(492)
—
(492)
Transfer
—
—
—
—
(290)
290
—
Transactions with owners of the Company
Reversal of share-based payment charges
—
—
—
(197)
—
—
(197)
Dividend
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Own shares purchased by Employee Benefit Trust
—
—
—
—
—
(260)
(260)
Total transactions with owners of the Company
—
—
—
(197)
—
(260)
(457)
Balance at 5 May 2024
625
28,322
(54)
2,583
129
(21,519)
10,086
1	 Hedging reserve includes £410k (FY23: £150k) in relation to changes in forward points which are recognised in other comprehensive income 
and accumulated as a cost of hedging within the hedging reserve.
2	 Hedging reserve contains a £290k (FY23: £nil) transfer from retained earnings that in relation to a historical tax charge for financial derivatives that had 
previously been recognised in the consolidated income statement.
Accompanying notes that form part of these financial statements are on pages 84 to 114.
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
82

 
Note
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated – 
Note 15)
£000
Profit for the period (including Adjusting items)
6,377
9,364
Adjustments for:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
13
3,663
5,147
Impairment of property, plant and equipment
13
1,589
775
Reversal of impairment of property, plant and equipment
13
(1,272)
(574)
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
14
18,224
18,451
Impairment of right-of-use assets
14
3,394
2,173
Reversal of impairment of right-of-use assets
14
(4,620)
(2,562)
Amortisation of intangible assets
12
632
997
Impairment of intangible assets
12
442
1,048
Reversal of impairment of intangible assets
12
(850)
—
Derivative exchange loss/(gain)
494
(721)
Financial income
8
(19)
(227)
Financial expense
8
536
518
Interest on lease liabilities
14
3,984
4,130
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment and intangibles
12, 13
202
163
Profit on disposal of right-of-use asset and lease liability
14
(3,537)
(4,717)
Share-based payment charges
26
(197)
528
Taxation
9
541
(395)
Operating cash flows before changes in working capital
29,583
34,098
(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
(963)
1,033
Decrease/(increase) in inventories
1,149
(3,129)
Decrease in trade and other payables
(3,672)
(1,443)
(Decrease)/increase in provisions
22
(844)
746
Cash flows from operating activities
25,253
31,305
Corporation tax paid
(97)
(1,508)
Net cash inflow from operating activities
25,156
29,797
Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of property, plant and equipment
13
(6,078)
(7,296)
Capital contributions received from landlords
1,460
1,928
Acquisition of intangible assets
12
(1,208)
(1,309)
Interest received
8
19
227
Net cash outflow from investing activities
(5,807)
(6,450)
Cash flows from financing activities
Payment of lease liabilities (capital)
20
(22,471)
(23,250)
Payment of lease liabilities (interest)
20
(3,984)
(4,130)
Payment of fees from loans and borrowings
(60)
(336)
Interest paid
(434)
(321)
Repayment of bank borrowings
(6,000)
(4,000)
Proceeds from bank borrowings
6,000
4,000
Dividend paid
10
—
(1,492)
Own shares purchased by Employee Benefit Trust
24
(260)
(473)
Net cash outflow from financing activities
(27,209)
(30,002)
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents
(7,860)
(6,655)
Exchange rate movements
(717)
571
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
19
10,196
16,280
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
19
1,619
10,196
Accompanying notes that form part of these financial statements are on pages 84 to 114.
Consolidated cash flow statement
For the period ended 5 May 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
83
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

1. Accounting policies
Where accounting policies are particular to an individual note, narrative regarding the policy is included with the relevant note; for 
example, the accounting policy in relation to inventory is detailed in Note 17 (Inventories). 
(a) General information
TheWorks.co.uk plc is a leading UK multi-channel value retailer of arts and crafts, stationery, toys, games and books, offering customers 
a differentiated proposition as a value alternative to full price specialist retailers. The Group operates a network of over 500 stores in the 
UK and Ireland and online.
TheWorks.co.uk plc (the Company) is a UK-based public limited company (11325534) with its registered office at Boldmere House, Faraday 
Avenue, Hams Hall Distribution Park, Coleshill, Birmingham B46 1AL. 
These consolidated financial statements for the 53 weeks ended 5 May 2024 (FY24 or the Period) comprise the results of the Company and 
its subsidiaries (together referred to as the Group) and are presented in pounds sterling. All values are rounded to the nearest thousand 
(£000), except when otherwise indicated. 
(b) Basis of preparation
The Group financial statements have been prepared on a historical cost basis, except for financial assets at fair value through profit 
and loss including derivatives. The financial statements are in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards. 
The preparation of the financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the 
application of policies, and the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and associated assumptions 
are based on historical experience, future budgets and forecasts, and various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and liabilities that are not 
readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates. 
The estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in 
which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects 
both current and future periods. The Group’s significant judgements and estimates relate to going concern and fixed asset impairment; 
these are described in Note 1(e). 
(i) Going concern 
The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which the Directors consider appropriate for the reasons 
set out below. 
The Directors have assessed the prospects of the Group, taking into account its current position and the potential impact of the principal 
risks documented in the Strategic report on pages 38 to 43. The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, 
which the Directors consider appropriate having made this assessment. 
The Group has prepared cash flow forecasts for a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of these financial statements 
(the going concern assessment period), based on the Board’s forecast for FY25 and its three-year plan, referred to as the ‘Base Case’ 
scenario. In addition, a ‘severe but plausible’ ‘Downside Case’ sensitivity has been prepared to support the Board’s conclusion regarding 
going concern, by stress testing the Base Case to indicate the financial headroom resulting from applying more pessimistic assumptions. 
In assessing the basis of preparation, the Directors have considered: 
•	 The external environment. 
•	 The Group’s financial position including the quantum and expectations regarding availability of bank facilities. 
•	 The potential impact on financial performance of the risks described in the Strategic report. 
•	 The output of the Base Case scenario, which mirrors the Group’s three-year plan and therefore represents its estimate of the most likely 
financial performance over the forecast period. 
•	 Measures to maintain or increase liquidity in the event of a significant downturn in trading. 
•	 The resilience of the Group to these risks having a more severe impact, evaluated via the Downside Case which shows the impact 
on the Group’s cash flows, bank facility headroom and covenants. 
These factors are described below. 
External environment 
The risks which are considered the most significant to this evaluation relate to the economy and the market, specifically their effect on 
the strength of trading conditions, and the Group’s ability to successfully execute its strategy. The risk of weaker consumer demand is 
considered to be the greater of these risks, due to higher interest rates and years of high inflation, and its potential effect on economic 
growth and consumer spending. 
An emerging risk has been noted in relation to the possible effects of climate change, but this is not expected to have a material financial 
impact on the Group during the forecast period.
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
(Forming part of the financial statements)
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
84

1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(i) Going concern continued
Financial position and bank facilities 
At the end of FY24 the Group held net cash at bank of £1.6m (FY23: net cash at bank of £10.2m). 
The Group’s £20.0m revolving credit facility (FY23: £30.0m) expires on 30 November 2026 and includes two financial covenants which are 
tested quarterly:
1.	 The ‘Leverage Ratio’ or level of net debt to last 12 months’ (LTM) EBITDA must not exceed 2.5 times during the life of the facility. 
2.	The ‘Fixed Charge Cover’ or ratio of LTM EBITDA, prior to deducting rent and interest, to LTM rent and interest. In March 2024 the Group 
agreed an amendment to the facility agreement which resulted in a reset of the fixed charge cover: until 31 October 2025, the ratio must 
be at least 1.05 times and thereafter at least 1.20 times. 
The Group expects to be able to operate and have sufficient headroom within these covenants during the forecast period. 
Potential impact of risks on financial scenarios 
It is considered unlikely that all the risks described in the Strategic report would manifest themselves to adversely affect the business at 
the same time. The Base Case scenario/the Group’s three-year financial plan implicitly already takes into account the risks described, 
and assumes that they manifest themselves in a way or to an extent that might be considered ‘neutral’. 
The Downside Case scenario assumes that there are more severely negative effects than in the Base Case. In particular, the Downside 
Case assumptions are that macroeconomic conditions are significantly worse, resulting in reduced consumer spending and lower sales. 
It should be noted that the Base Case already takes into account the current subdued consumer market conditions. The Downside 
Case assumes that conditions become worse still from the second half of the FY25 financial year. 
Base Case scenario 
The Base Case scenario assumptions reflect the following factors:
•	 The macroeconomic environment remains challenging resulting in only marginal total sales growth in FY25 with sales in the outer years 
reflecting a slightly improving external environment.
•	 The FY25 product margin percentage is exceeding the expected performance in the Base Case and has increased significantly 
compared to the prior year. It reflects the expected full-year effect of targeted cost price reductions, along with a slightly favourable 
hedged FX rate; these are partly offset by the increased ocean container freight costs that have been in place since the beginning 
of 2024.
•	 The anticipated further inflationary effects, in particular the increase in the National Living Wage. In respect of other costs, notably 
property occupancy costs, it is not expected that there will be further significant inflationary effects in the forecast period following 
the significant increases (for example in electricity costs) already experienced during FY24.
•	 Capital expenditure levels are in line with the Group’s strategic plan. A significant proportion of the Group’s capital expenditure is 
discretionary, particularly over a short-term time period. As a result, if required, it can therefore be reduced substantially, for example, 
in the event of the Group needing to preserve cash.
•	 The anticipated costs of the Group’s net zero climate change commitments have been incorporated within the Base Case model. As set 
out in the climate-related disclosures on pages 30 to 37, the impact on the Group’s financial performance and position is not expected 
to be material in the short term.
•	 The plan makes provision for capital distribution payments in the form of buy backs or dividends.
Under the Base Case scenario, the Group expects to make routine operational use of its bank facility each year as stock levels are 
increased prior to peak sales occurring.
The output of the Base Case scenario indicates that the Group has sufficient financial resources to continue to operate as a going 
concern and for the financial statements to be prepared on this basis.
Measures to maintain or increase liquidity 
If necessary, mitigating actions can and would be taken in response to a significant downturn in trading such as is described below, 
which would increase liquidity.
These include, for example, delaying and reducing stock purchases, stock liquidation, reductions in capital expenditure, the review 
of payment terms and the review of dividend levels. Some of these potential mitigations have been built into the Downside Case model, 
and some are additional measures that would be available in the event of that scenario, or worse, actually occurring.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
85
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
85

1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(i) Going concern continued
Severe but plausible Downside Case scenario 
The Downside Case makes the following assumptions to reflect more adverse macroeconomic conditions compared to the Base Case: 
•	 In FY25 store and online sales are assumed to be lower than the Base Case by 1.5% and 2.0% respectively reflecting a more challenging 
consumer environment over peak. 
•	 Store and online sales continue to be lower than the Base Case in FY26 and FY27 and store sales are further reduced as the assumption 
surrounding new store growth is reduced in the Downside Case.
•	 The product gross margin percentage is lower in FY26 and FY27 reflecting continued higher ocean freight rates (which are already built 
into the FY25 Base Case) along with an assumed increase in promotional activity to allow for the clearance of stock which is assumed 
would have accumulated due to lower sales levels. Expected FX requirements are hedged until mid-FY26. Other gross margin inputs are 
relatively controllable, including via the setting of selling prices to reflect any systematic changes in the cost price of goods bought 
for resale.
•	 Volume related costs in the Downside Case are lowered where they logically alter in a direct relationship with sales levels, for example, 
forecast online fulfilment and marketing costs. The model also reflects certain steps which could be taken to mitigate the effect of lower 
sales, depending on management’s assessment of the situation at the time. These include adjustments to stock purchases, reducing 
capital expenditure, reductions in variable labour usage and the suspension of dividend payments.
•	 The combined financial effect of the modified assumptions in this scenario compared with the Base Case, over the three-year period, 
including implementing some of the mitigating activities available, would result in: 
•	 A reduction in store net sales of approximately £30m. 
•	 A reduction in online net sales of approximately £3m. 
•	 A reduction to EBITDA of approximately £13m. 
Under this scenario the Group will draw on its bank facility for the usual peak stock build. The bank facility financial covenants are 
complied with throughout the period, including during the pre-Christmas period when the facility is being used. There is sufficient 
headroom within both covenants and sufficient cash headroom under this scenario throughout the going concern period. 
Going concern and basis of preparation conclusion 
The current economic environment remains challenging with the cost-of-living crisis continuing to impact much of the UK particularly 
low-income households; however, the rate of inflation is slowing, and interest rates are at the lowest since July 2023. There is sufficient 
cash headroom and headroom within both covenants under both scenarios and therefore the Directors are confident that the Group will 
have sufficient funds to continue to meet its liabilities as they fall due for at least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial 
statements and have therefore prepared the financial statements on a going concern basis. 
(ii) New accounting standards
The Group has applied the following new standards and interpretations for the first time for the annual reporting period commencing 
1 May 2023:
•	 Disclosure of Accounting Policies – Amendments to IAS 1 and IFRS Practice Statement 2
•	 Definition of Accounting Estimates – Amendments to IAS 8
•	 Deferred Tax Related to Assets and Liabilities Arising from a Single Transaction – Amendments to IAS 12
The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above has not led to any changes to the Group’s accounting policies or had 
any other material impact on the financial position or performance of the Group.
As at the date of approval of these financial statements, the following standards and interpretations, which have not been applied 
in these financial statements, were in issue, but not yet effective:
•	 Non-Current Liabilities with Covenants – Amendments to IAS 1 and Classifications of Liabilities as Current or Non-Current – 
Amendments to IAS 11
•	 Lease Liability in a Sale and Leaseback – Amendments to IFRS 161
•	 Supplier Finance Agreements – Amendments to IAS 7 and IFRS 71
1	 Effective for annual periods commencing after 1 January 2024.
The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above is not expected to have a material impact on the financial position 
or performance of the Group.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
86
86
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

1. Accounting policies continued
(c) Accounting convention
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for certain financial assets 
and financial liabilities (including derivative instruments), which are held at fair value.
(d) Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities controlled by the Company 
(its subsidiaries). Control is achieved when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity 
and has the ability to direct the activities that affect those returns through its power over the entity. Consolidation of a subsidiary begins 
from the date control commences and continues until control ceases. The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee 
if circumstances indicate that there are changes to the elements of control detailed above.
An Employee Benefit Trust operated on the Group’s behalf (EBT) is acting as an agent of the Company; therefore, the assets and liabilities 
of the EBT are aggregated into the Company balance sheet and shares held by the EBT in the Company are presented as a deduction 
from reserves.
(e) Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of consolidated financial statements requires the Group to make estimates and judgements that affect the application 
of policies and reported amounts.
Critical judgements represent key decisions made by management in the application of the Group’s accounting policies. Where a significant 
risk of materially different outcomes exists, this will represent a key source of estimation uncertainty. 
Estimates and judgements are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed 
to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates.
Key sources of estimation uncertainty which are material to the financial statements are described in the context of the matters to which 
they relate, in the following notes:
Description
Note
Page
Going concern
1(b)(i)
84 to 86
Impairment of intangible assets, property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets
12, 13, 14
94 to 101
Inventory provisions
17
104
Other provisions
22
107
Fair value of share options issued
26
113 and 114
2. Segmental reporting 
IFRS 8 requires segment information to be presented on the same basis as is used by the Chief Operating Decision Maker for assessing 
performance and allocating resources.
The Group has one operating segment with two revenue streams: bricks and mortar stores and online. This reflects the Group’s 
management and reporting structure as viewed by the Board of Directors, which is considered to be the Group’s Chief Operating Decision 
Maker. Aggregation is deemed appropriate due to both operating segments having similar economic characteristics, similar products 
on offer and a similar customer base.
3. Revenue
Accounting policy
Revenue comprises receipts from the sale of goods, less deductions for actual and expected returns, discounts and vouchers 
redeemable by members of the Group’s loyalty scheme, and is stated net of value added tax and other sales taxes. Revenue is 
recognised at the point of completing the physical sale in stores, and when the goods have been delivered to the customer in the 
case of online sales. These are the points when IFRS 15 ‘performance obligations’ are deemed to have been satisfied.
Transactions that result in customers earning points subsequently exchangeable for discounts under the Group’s loyalty scheme are 
accounted for as multiple element revenue transactions. The fair value of the consideration received is allocated between the goods 
supplied and the points granted. The consideration allocated to the points is measured by reference to their fair value – the amount 
for which the points could theoretically be sold separately. The consideration allocated to the points is not recognised as revenue at 
the time of the initial sale transaction, but is deferred, and recognised as revenue when the points are redeemed and the Group’s 
obligations have been fulfilled. The Group’s loyalty scheme was closed to new members on 30 March 2024. Customers were able to 
redeem vouchers earned until 29 June 2024, following which the scheme was closed and the liability extinguished.
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Sale of goods
 
 
UK
 277,828 
 275,305 
EU
 4,757 
 4,797 
Total revenues
 282,585 
 280,102 
Seasonality of operations
The Group’s revenue is subject to seasonal fluctuations as a result of a significant sales uplift during the approach to Christmas, from 
October to December. Therefore, the first half of the financial year, from April to October, typically produces lower revenue and profit than 
the second half.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
87
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
87

4. Alternative performance measures (APMs)
Accounting policy
In the reporting of financial information, the Group tracks a number of APMs in managing its business. APMs should be considered in 
addition to IFRS measurements. The Group’s definitions of APMs may not be comparable with similarly titled performance measures 
and disclosures by other entities.
The Group believes that these APMs provide stakeholders with additional helpful information on the performance of the business. They 
are consistent with how business performance is planned and reported internally and are also consistent with how these measures 
have been reported historically. Some of the APMs are also used for the purpose of setting remuneration targets.
Like-for-like (LFL) sales
LFL sales are defined by the Group as the year-on-year growth in gross sales from stores which have been trading for a full financial year 
prior to the current year and have been trading throughout the current financial period being reported on, and from the Company’s online 
store, calculated on a calendar week basis. The measure is used widely in the retail industry as an indicator of sales performance. LFL 
sales are calculated on a gross basis to ensure that fluctuations in the VAT rates of products sold are excluded from the like-for-like sales 
growth percentage figure.
A reconciliation of IFRS revenue to sales on an LFL basis is set out below:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Total LFL sales
294,072
296,818
Non-LFL store sales
26,426
19,817
Total gross sales
320,498
316,635
VAT
(36,599)
(35,149)
Loyalty points
(1,314)
(1,384)
Revenue per consolidated income statement
282,585
280,102
FY24 is a 53-week period; therefore, the LFL sales APM compares 53 weeks of FY24 to the equivalent 53 weeks of FY23. Non-LFL store sales 
for FY23 include the impact of the 53rd week which is removed to reconcile to the reported sales number.
Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA (EBITDA) and Adjusted profit after tax
EBITDA is defined by the Group as pre-IFRS 16 earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and profit/loss on the disposal 
of fixed assets, after adding back or deducting Adjusting items. See Note 5 for a description of Adjusting items. Pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA 
is used for the bank facility LTM EBITDA covenant calculations.
The table below provides a reconciliation of pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA to profit after tax and the impact of IFRS 16:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated – 
Note 15)
£000
Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA
6,042
9,000
Income statement rental charges not recognised under IFRS 16
24,288
25,672
Foreign exchange difference on euro leases
69
(152)
Post-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA
30,399
34,520
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
(168)
(149)
Loss on disposal of intangible assets
(34)
(14)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
(3,663)
(5,147)
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
(18,224)
(18,451)
Amortisation
(632)
(997)
Finance expenses
(4,520)
(4,648)
Finance income
19
227
Tax credit/(charge)
(541)
395
Adjusted profit after tax
2,636
5,736
Adjusting items (including impairment charges and reversals)
3,741
3,628
Tax charge
—
—
Profit after tax
6,377
9,364
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
88
88
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

4. Alternative performance measures (APMs) continued
Profit before tax and IFRS 16
The table provides a reconciliation of profit/(loss) before tax and IFRS 16 adjustments to profit/(loss) before tax.
 
FY24
FY23 (Restated – Note 15)
 
Adjusted
£000
Adjusting items
£000
Total
£000
Adjusted
£000
Adjusting items
£000
Total
£000
Profit/(loss) before tax and 
IFRS 16 adjustments
1,118
(1,022)
96
3,603
(1,488)
2,115
Remove rental charges not recognised 
under IFRS 16
24,166
—
24,166
25,545
—
25,545
Remove hire costs from hire of equipment
122
—
122
128
—
128
Remove depreciation charged on the 
existing assets
(94)
—
(94)
(1,236)
—
(1,236)
Remove interest charged on the 
existing liability
4
—
4
34
—
34
Depreciation charge on right-of-use assets
(18,224)
—
(18,224)
(18,451)
—
(18,451)
Interest cost on lease liability
(3,984)
—
(3,984)
(4,130)
—
(4,130)
Profit on disposal of lease liability
—
3,537
3,537
—
4,717
4,717
Foreign exchange difference on euro leases
69
—
69
(152)
—
(152)
Additional impairment charge under IAS 36
—
1,226
1,226
—
399
399
Net impact on profit/(loss)
2,059
4,763
6,822
1,738
5,116
6,854
Profit/(loss) before tax
3,177
3,741
6,918
5,341
3,628
8,969
Adjusted profit metrics
Profit measures including operating profit, profit before tax, profit for the period and earnings per share are calculated on an Adjusted 
basis by adding back or deducting Adjusting items. These adjusted metrics are included within the consolidated income statement and 
consolidated statement of other comprehensive income, with further details of Adjusting items included in Note 5.
5. Adjusting items
Adjusting items are unusual in nature or incidence and sufficiently material in size that in the judgement of the Directors they merit 
disclosure separately on the face of the financial statements to ensure that the reader has a proper understanding of the Group’s 
financial performance and that there is comparability of financial performance between periods.
The Directors believe that the Adjusted profit and earnings per share measures included in this report provide additional useful information 
to users of the accounts. These measures are consistent with how business performance is measured internally. The profit before tax and 
Adjusting items measure is not a recognised profit measure under IFRS and may not be directly comparable with Adjusted profit measures 
used by other companies. 
If a transaction or related series of transactions has been treated as Adjusting in one accounting period, the same treatment will be 
applied consistently year on year.
In relation to FY24, the items classified as Adjusting, as shown below, were related to transactions that had been treated as adjusting 
in prior periods.
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated – 
Note 15)
£000
Cost of sales
 
 
Impairment charges
5,333
5,702
Impairment reversals
(6,742)
(4,613)
Profit on disposal of right of use assets and lease liabilities1
(3,537)
(4,717)
Other exceptional items
1,205
—
Total Adjusting items
(3,741)
(3,628)
1	 In FY23, profit on disposal of right of use assets and leases liabilities includes a gain on modification of right of use assets of £3.6m.
Impairment charges and reversals of prior year impairment charges relate to fixed assets (see Notes 13, 14 and 15). 
Profit on disposal of right-of-use assets and lease liabilities relate to leases (see Note 14).
Other exceptional items comprise of £0.5m (FY23: £nil) of professional fees and other costs related to the listing of the Company on AIM 
and £0.7m (FY23: £nil) of redundancy costs related to the restructure of the Operating Board.	
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
89
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
89

6. Operating profit
Operating profit before Adjusting items is stated after charging the following items:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated – 
Note 15)
£000
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
168
149
Loss on disposal of intangible assets
34
14
Depreciation
21,887
23,598
Amortisation
632
997
Net foreign exchange loss
170
392
Cost of inventories recognised as an expense
120,530
119,085
Staff costs
67,855
62,235
Auditor’s remuneration:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated)
£000
Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of the Group’s annual accounts
300
850
Amounts payable in respect of other services to the Company and its subsidiaries
 
 
Audit of the accounts of subsidiaries
42
40
Audit related assurance services (provision of turnover certificates required under certain leases)
5
1
Total 
347
891
7. Staff numbers and costs
The average number of people employed by the Group (including Directors) during the period, analysed by category, were as follows:
 
Number of employees
 
FY24
FY23
Store Support Centre colleagues 
 280 
 243 
Store colleagues
 3,590 
 3,564 
Warehouse and distribution colleagues
 156 
 147 
 
 4,026 
 3,954 
The corresponding aggregate payroll costs were as follows:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Wages and salaries
 62,367 
 57,189 
Social security costs
 4,422 
 4,156 
Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes
 1,066 
 890 
Total employee costs
 67,855 
 62,235 
Agency labour costs
 2,977 
 2,035 
Total staff costs
 70,832 
 64,270 
The Directors’ remuneration for the period was as follows:
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Directors’ remuneration 
 791 
759 
Contributions to defined contribution plans
 16 
15
 
 807 
774 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
90
90
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

7. Staff numbers and costs continued
The following number of Directors were members of:
FY24
FY23 (Restated)
Company defined contribution scheme
2
2
 
2
2
The highest paid Director’s remuneration and contributions to defined contribution plans during the year were as follows:
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Directors’ remuneration
 337 
322
Contributions to defined contribution plans
10
9
347
331
8. Finance income and expense
Accounting policy
Finance expense comprises interest charges and amortised facility fee costs. Finance income comprises interest income and is 
recognised when it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the Group and the amount can be measured reliably. Interest 
is recognised in profit as it accrues, using the effective interest method.
Recognised in consolidated statement of comprehensive income
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Finance income
 
 
Bank interest receivable
19 
227
Total finance income
19 
227
Finance expense
 
 
Bank interest payable
(389) 
(295)
Other interest payable
(147)
(223)
Interest on lease liabilities
(3,984) 
(4,130)
Total finance expense
(4,520) 
(4,648)
Net financing expense
(4,501)
(4,421)
Other interest payable includes the amortisation of the arrangement fees of the RCF (Note 20).
9. Taxation
Accounting policy
The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.
Current tax
The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the income 
statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items 
that are never taxable or deductible. The Group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or 
substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.
Deferred tax
Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities 
in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit and is accounted for using the 
balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred 
tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary 
differences can be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition 
of goodwill or from the initial recognition (other than in a business combination) of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that 
affects neither the taxable profit nor the accounting profit.
Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and associates, and 
interests in joint ventures, except where the Group is able to control the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that 
the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax assets arising from deductible temporary differences 
associated with such investments and interests are only recognised to the extent that it is probable that there will be sufficient taxable 
profits against which to utilise the benefits of the temporary differences and they are expected to reverse in the foreseeable future.
The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
91
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
91

9. Taxation continued
Accounting policy continued
Deferred tax continued
Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled, or the asset is realised 
based on tax laws and rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged or 
credited in the income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive income, in which case 
the deferred tax is also dealt with in other comprehensive income.
The measurement of deferred tax liabilities and assets reflects the tax consequences that would follow from the manner in which the 
Group expects, at the end of the reporting period, to recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax 
liabilities and when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax 
assets and liabilities on a net basis.
Current tax and deferred tax for the year
Current and deferred tax are recognised in profit or loss, except when they relate to items that are recognised in other comprehensive 
income or directly in equity, in which case the current and deferred tax are also recognised in other comprehensive income or directly 
in equity, respectively. Where current tax or deferred tax arises from the initial accounting for a business combination, the tax effect 
is included in the accounting for the business combination.
Recognised in consolidated income statement
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated1)
£000
Current tax expense/(credit)
 
 
Current year
22
230
Adjustments for prior years
33
(611)
Current tax expense/(credit)
55
(381)
Deferred tax expense/(credit) 
 
 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
1,286
(212)
Change in tax rate
—
(172)
Adjustments for prior years
(800)
370
Deferred tax expense/(credit)
486
(14)
Total tax expense/(credit)
541
(395)
1	 The FY23 corporation tax charge has been restated to reflect the tax impact of the restatements documented in Note 15.
The UK corporation tax rate for FY24 was 25.0% (FY23: 19.5%). Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the 
respective jurisdictions.
As the deferred tax assets and liabilities should be recognised based on the corporation tax rate applicable when they are anticipated 
to unwind, the assets and liabilities on UK operations have been recognised at a rate of 25.0% (FY23: 25.0%). Assets and liabilities arising 
on foreign operations have been recognised at the applicable overseas tax rates.
Reconciliation of effective tax rate
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated –
see above)
£000
Profit for the year
6,918
8,969
Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 25.0% (FY23: 19.5%)
1,730
1,749
Non-deductible expenses
195
147
Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions
14
(13)
Tax over provided in prior periods
(767)
(111)
Utilisation of unrecognised tax losses brought forward
(751)
(2,114)
Deferred tax not recognised
—
(18)
Losses carried forwards
120
137
Change in tax rate
—
(172)
Total tax expense/(credit)
541
(395)
Effective tax rate
7.8%
(4.4%)
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
92
92
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

9. Taxation continued
Reconciliation of effective tax rate continued
The Group’s total income tax charge in respect of the period was £541k (FY23: credit of £395k). The effective tax rate on the total profit 
before tax was 7.8% (FY23: (4.4%)) whilst the effective tax rate on the total profit before Adjusting items was 17.0% (FY23: (7.4%)). The difference 
between the total effective tax rate and the Adjusted tax rate relates to fixed asset impairment charges and reversals within Adjusting 
items being non-deductible for tax purposes.
The current year tax expense recognised above is predominantly driven by deferred tax movements on our fixed assets and leases.
There is also a tax charge of £323k (FY23: credit £262k) shown in the statement of comprehensive income for fair value movements on 
derivatives which impacts the deferred tax balance (Note 16).
Consolidated statement of financial position
Included in the consolidated statement of financial position is a current tax debtor of £1,189k (FY23: £1,149k) resulting from the overpayment 
of taxation in prior periods arising from the prior year restatement (Note 15).
10. Dividends
Accounting policy
At the balance sheet date, dividends are only recognised as a liability if they are appropriately authorised and are no longer at the 
discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.
Pence per share
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Final dividend for the period ended 1 May 2022 paid in FY23
2.4p
—
1,492
Total dividend paid to shareholders during the period
—
1,492
The Board has not recommended the payment of a dividend in respect of FY24 (FY23: 1.6 pence). At the FY23 Annual General Meeting 
the resolution to approve the payment of the FY23 dividend was not approved and consequently the dividend declared in the FY23 
Annual Report was not distributed to shareholders.
11. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit or loss for the period, attributable to ordinary shareholders, by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.
Diluted earnings per share is based on the weighted average number of shares in issue for the period, adjusted for the dilutive effect of 
potential ordinary shares. Potential ordinary shares represent shares that may be issued in connection with employee share incentive awards.
The Group has chosen to present an Adjusted earnings per share measure, with profit adjusted for Adjusting items (see Note 5 for further 
details) to reflect the Group’s underlying profit for the period.
 
FY24
Number
FY23
Number
Number of shares in issue
62,500,000
 62,500,000 
Number of dilutive share options
 — 
621,130
Number of shares for diluted earnings per share
 62,500,000 
63,121,130
 
£000
£000
(Restated – 
Note 15)
Total profit for the financial period
 6,377 
 9,364 
Adjusting items
 (3,741)
 (3,628)
Adjusted profit for Adjusted earnings per share
 2,636 
 5,736 
 
Pence
Pence
(Restated – 
Note 15)
Basic earnings per share
 10.2 
 15.0 
Diluted earnings per share
 10.2 
 14.8 
Adjusted basic earnings per share
4.2 
 9.2 
Adjusted diluted earnings per share
 4.2
9.1 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
93
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
93

12. Intangible assets
Accounting policy 
Goodwill
Goodwill arising on consolidation represents any excess of the consideration paid and the amount of any non-controlling interest in 
the acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities (including intangible assets) of the acquired entity at the date 
of the acquisition. After initial recognition, goodwill is measured at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is recognised 
as an asset and assessed for impairment annually or as triggering events occur. Any impairment in value is recognised within the 
income statement. Goodwill was fully impaired in FY20.
Software
Where computer software is not an integral part of a related item of computer hardware, the software is treated as an intangible 
asset. Capitalised software costs include external direct costs of goods and services (such as consultancy), as well as internal payroll 
related costs for employees who are directly working on the project. Internal payroll related costs are capitalised if the recognition 
criteria of IAS 38 Intangible Assets are met or are expensed as incurred otherwise.
Capitalised software development costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over their expected economic lives, normally between 
three and seven years. Computer software under development is held at cost less any recognised impairment loss. Any impairment in 
value is recognised within the income statement and treated as an Adjusting item.
 
Goodwill
£000
Software
£000
Total
£000
Cost
 
 
 
At 30 April 2023
16,180
9,310
25,490
Additions
—
1,208
1,208
Disposals
—
(219)
(219)
At 5 May 2024
16,180
10,299
26,479
Amortisation and impairment
At 30 April 2023 (Restated)
16,180
8,394
24,574
Amortisation charge
—
632
632
Impairment charge
—
442
442
Impairment reversals
—
(850)
(850)
Disposals1
—
(185)
(185)
At 5 May 2024
16,180
8,433
24,613
Net book value
At 30 April 2023 
—
916
916
At 5 May 2024
—
1,866
1,866
1	 During FY24 the Group reviewed assets on the fixed asset register with a nil net book value. Following this review intangible assets with a cost 
and accumulated depreciation of £207k were deemed to no longer be in use by the Group and have therefore been disposed of. 
 
Goodwill
£000
Software
£000
Total
£000
Cost
 
 
 
At 1 May 2022
16,180
9,058
25,238
Additions
—
1,309
1,309
Disposals
—
(1,057)
(1,057)
At 30 April 2023
16,180
9,310
25,490
Amortisation and impairment
 
 
 
At 1 May 2022 (Restated)
16,180
7,392
23,572
Amortisation charge (Restated2)
—
997
997
Impairment charge (Restated2)
—
1,048
1,048
Disposals
—
(1,043)
(1,043)
At 30 April 2023 (Restated)
16,180
8,394
24,574
Net book value
 
 
 
At 1 May 2022 (Restated2)
—
1,666
1,666
At 30 April 2023 (Restated2)
—
916
916
2	 These balances have been restated to reflect the impact of the prior period restatements in Note 15.
Refer to Note 13 for details of impairment of intangible assets.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
94
94
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

13. Property, plant and equipment
Accounting policy
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at their cost of acquisition or production, less accumulated depreciation 
and accumulated impairment losses.
Depreciation is charged on a straight line basis over the estimated useful lives as follows:
•	 Leasehold property improvements: over the life of the lease.
•	 Fixtures and fittings: 15% per annum straight-line or depreciated on a straight-line basis over the remaining life of the lease, 
whichever is shorter.
•	 Computer equipment: 25% to 50% per annum straight line.
The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date, with the effect 
of any changes in estimate accounted for on a prospective basis. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its 
recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount.
An item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise 
from the continued use of the asset. The gain or loss arising on the disposal or scrappage of an asset is determined as the difference 
between the sale proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is recognised in profit or loss.
Impairment of tangible and intangible assets
The carrying amounts of the Group’s tangible and intangible assets with a measurable useful life are reviewed at each balance sheet 
date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment to their value. If such an indication exists, the asset’s recoverable 
amount is estimated and compared to its carrying value. Where the asset does not generate cash flows that are independent from 
other assets, the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the cash generating unit (CGU) to which the asset belongs. The 
Directors consider an individual retail store to be a CGU, as well as the Company’s trading website. 
The recoverable amount of an asset is the greater of its fair value less disposal cost and its value in use (the present value of 
the future cash flows that the asset is expected to generate). In determining value in use, the present value of future cash flows 
is discounted using a discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money in relation to the period 
of the investment and the risks specific to the asset concerned. 
The carrying value represents each CGU’s specific assets, as well as the right-of-use assets, plus an allocation of corporate assets 
where these assets can be allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis. 
Where the carrying value exceeds the recoverable amount an impairment loss is established with a charge being made to the 
income statement. When the reasons for a write down no longer exist, the write down is reversed in the income statement up to 
the net book value that the relevant asset would have had if it had not been written down and if it had been depreciated. 
Measuring recoverable amounts 
The Group estimates the recoverable amount of each CGU based on the greater of its fair value less disposal cost and its value in 
use (VIU), derived from a discounted cash flow model which excludes IFRS 16 lease payments. In assessing the fair value less disposal 
cost the ability to sublease each store has been considered and it is concluded that this is not applicable for the majority of the store 
estate. Where it is deemed reasonable to assume the ability to sublet, the potential cash inflows generated are insignificant; therefore, 
the VIU calculation is used for all stores. A proportion of click & collect sales are included in store cash flows to reflect the contribution 
stores make to fulfilling such orders. The key assumptions applied by management in the VIU calculations are those regarding the 
growth rates of sales and gross margins, medium-term growth rates, central overhead allocation and the discount rate used to 
discount the assumed cash flows to present value. 
Projected cash flows for each store are limited to the useful life of each store as determined by its current lease term unless a lease 
has already expired or is due to expire within 12 months of 5 May 2024 where the intention is to remain in the store and renew the 
lease. For these leases, the lease term of the previously expired lease is used for cash flow projections.
Projected cash flows for the trading website are limited to 60 months as this is in line with the average useful economic life of the 
assets assigned to the web CGU.
Impairment triggers
Due to the challenging macroeconomic environment and the existence of a material brought forwards impairment charge, all CGUs 
other than stores which have been open for less than 12 months have been assessed for impairment. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
95
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
95

13. Property, plant and equipment continued
Key assumptions 
The key financial assumptions used in the estimation of the recoverable amount are set out below. The values assigned to the key 
assumptions represent management’s assessment of current market conditions and future trends and have been based on historical 
data from external and internal sources. Management determined the values assigned to these financial assumptions as follows:
The post-tax discount rate is derived from the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, which has been estimated using the capital 
asset pricing model, the inputs of which include a company risk-free rate, an equity risk premium, a Group size premium, a forecasting risk 
premium and a risk adjustment (beta). The discount rate is compared to the published discount rates of comparable businesses and 
relevant industry data prior to being adopted. 
 
FY24
FY23 (Restated)
Post-tax discount rate
10.50%
11.95%
Medium-term growth rate
2.0%
1.0%
While the online CGU is in a different stage of establishment to that of the store CGUs, the same pre-tax discount rate has been used 
in the impairment assessment. Given that the website is not performing in line with expectations, all assets relating to the web CGU 
are fully impaired; as such an increase in the pre-tax discount rate used for the web assessment would not increase the impairment 
charge recognised.
Cash flow forecasts are derived from the most recent Board-approved corporate plans that form the Base Case on which the VIU 
calculations are based. These are described in Note 1(b)(i) (Going concern). 
The assumptions used in the estimation of future cash flows are: 
•	 Rates of growth in sales and gross margins, which have been determined on the basis of the factors described in Note 1(b)(i) 
(Going concern). 
•	 Central costs are reviewed to identify amounts which are necessarily incurred to generate the CGU cash flows. As a result of the analysis 
performed at the end of FY24, 89% (FY23: 87%) of central costs have been allocated by category using appropriate volumetrics.
Cash flows beyond the corporate plan period (FY28 and beyond) have been determined using the medium-term growth rate; this is based 
on management’s future expectations, reflecting, amongst other things, current market conditions and expected future trends and has 
been based on historical data from both external and internal sources. Immediately quantifiable impacts of climate change and costs 
expected to be incurred in connection with our net zero commitments are included within the cash flows. The useful economic lives of store 
assets are short in the context of climate change scenario models; therefore, no medium to long-term effects have been considered.
Impairment charge
During FY24, an impairment charge of £5,333k was recognised against 184 stores with a recoverable amount of £23,396k, and an 
impairment charge of £nil was recognised against the website (restated FY23: an impairment charge of £5,111k was recognised against 
161 stores with a recoverable amount of £17,437k and an impairment charge of £591k was recognised against the trading website). An 
impairment reversal of £5,883k has been recognised in FY24 relating to 135 stores with a recoverable amount of £33,537k as at 5 May 2024, 
and an impairment reversal of £859k was recognised against the website (restated FY23: an impairment reversal of £4,613k was recognised 
relating to 159 stores with a recoverable amount of £35,536k, and an impairment reversal of £nil was recognised against the website).
A net impairment credit of £1,409k (restated FY23: charge of £1,089k) has therefore been shown on the face of the consolidated income 
statement. In line with the previously adopted treatment, impairment charges and reversals have been shown as Adjusting items. 
Sensitivity analysis
Whilst the Directors believe the assumptions adopted are realistic, reasonably possible changes in key assumptions could still occur, 
which could cause the recoverable amount of certain stores to be lower or higher than the carrying amount. The impact on the net 
impairment charge recognised from reasonably possible changes in assumption are detailed below:
•	 A reduction in sales of 5% from the Base Case plan to reflect a potential downside scenario would result in an increase in the net 
impairment charge of £7,950k. An increase in sales of 5% from the Base Case plan would decrease the net impairment charge by £5,345k.
•	 A reduction in gross margin of 2% would result in an increase in the net impairment charge of £2,051k. An increase in gross margin of 2% 
would decrease the net impairment charge by £1,898k.
•	 A 200 basis point increase in the pre-tax discount rate would result in an increase in the net impairment charge of £1,245k, while a 
200 basis point decrease in the pre-tax discount rate would result in a decrease in the net impairment charge of £1,233k.
•	 A 100 basis point decrease in the medium-term growth rate would result in an increase in the net impairment charge of £480k, while 
a 100 basis point increase in the medium-term growth rate would result in a decrease in the net impairment charge of £470k.
•	 Increasing the percentage of central costs allocated across CGUs from 89% to 99% would result in an increase in the net impairment 
charge of £1,886k. Decreasing the percentage of central costs allocated across CGUs from 89% to 79% would result in a decrease 
in the net impairment charge of £1,756k.
Whilst the Directors consider their assumptions to be realistic, should actual results be different from expectations, then it is possible 
that the value of property, plant and equipment included in the balance sheet could become materially different to the estimates used.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
96
96
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

13. Property, plant and equipment continued
Sensitivity analysis continued
Property, plant and equipment
 
Leasehold 
improvements
£000
Plant and
equipment
£000
Fixtures and
fittings
£000
Total
£000
Cost
At 30 April 2023 (Restated2)
 7,408 
 3,656 
 19,195 
 30,259 
Additions
 409 
 353 
 3,971 
 4,733 
Disposals1
 (1,999)
 (246)
 (4,094)
 (6,339)
At 5 May 2024
 5,818 
 3,763 
 19,072 
 28,653 
Depreciation and impairment 
At 30 April 2023 (Restated2)
 5,682 
 3,245 
 9,559 
 18,486 
Depreciation charge 
 412 
 370 
 2,881 
 3,663 
Impairment charge
 209 
282 
1,098 
1,589 
Impairment reversals
(174) 
(618)
(480)
(1,272)
Disposals
 (1,980)
(141)
(4,050)
(6,171)
At 5 May 2024
 4,149 
3,138
9,008
16,295
Net book value
At 30 April 2023 (Restated2)
 1,726
 411 
 9,636 
 11,773 
At 5 May 2024
 1,669
625
10,064
12,358
1	 During FY24 the Group reviewed assets on the fixed asset register with a nil net book value. Following this review, fixed assets with a cost and accumulated 
depreciation of £4,263k were deemed to no longer be in use by the Group and have therefore been disposed of. The totals disposed of by category were 
as follows: £570k leasehold improvements; £213k plant and equipment; and £3,274k fixtures and fittings.
2	 These balances have been restated to reflect the impact of the prior period restatements (Note 15).
Leasehold 
improvements
£000
Plant and
equipment
£000
Fixtures and
fittings
£000
Total
£000
Cost
 
 
 
 
At 1 May 2022 
10,729
3,818
27,259
41,806
Additions
933
1,109
4,772
6,814
Disposals1
(4,254)
(1,271)
(12,836)
(18,361)
At 30 April 2023 (Restated2)
7,408
3,656
19,195
30,259
Depreciation and impairment 
 
 
 
 
At 1 May 2022 (Restated2)
 8,577 
 3,426 
 19,347 
31,350
Depreciation charge (Restated2)
 1,462 
 718 
 2,967 
5,147
Impairment charge (Restated2)
 5 
 331 
 439 
775
Impairment reversals (Restated2)
 (172)
—
 (402)
(574)
Disposals
 (4,190)
 (1,230)
 (12,792)
(18,212)
At 30 April 2023
5,682
3,245
9,559
18,486
Net book value
 
 
 
 
At 1 May 2022 (Restated2)
2,152
392
7,912
10,456
At 30 April 2023 (Restated2)
1,726
411
9,636
11,773
1	 During FY23 the Group reviewed assets on the fixed asset register with a nil net book value. Following this review, fixed assets with a cost and accumulated 
depreciation of £17,502k were deemed to no longer be in use by the Group and have therefore been disposed of. The totals disposed of by category were 
as follows: £3,995k leasehold improvements; £1,172k plant and equipment; and £12,375k fixtures and fittings.
2	 These balances have been restated to reflect the impact of the prior period restatements (Note 15).
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
97
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
97

14. Leases
Accounting policy
The Group leases many assets, including properties, IT equipment and warehouse equipment. 
Identification
At the inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether it is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if it conveys the 
right to control the use of an asset for a period of time, in exchange for consideration. Control is conveyed where the Group has both 
the right to direct the asset’s use and to obtain substantially all the economic benefits from that use. For each lease or lease component, 
the Group follows the lease accounting model as per IFRS 16, unless the permitted recognition exceptions can be used.
Recognition exceptions
The Group has elected to account for lease payments as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term or another systematic 
basis for the following types of leases:
(i)	 Leases with a term of 12 months or less.
(ii)	 Leases where the underlying asset has a low value.
(iii)	 Concession leases where the landlord has substantial substitution rights.
For leases where the Group has taken the short-term lease recognition exemption and there are any changes to the lease term 
or the lease is modified, the Group accounts for the lease as a new lease.
For leases where the Group has taken a recognition exemption as detailed above, rentals payable under these leases are charged 
to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the relevant lease, except where another more systematic basis is 
more representative of the time pattern in which economic benefits from the lease asset are consumed. 
As lessee 
Upon lease commencement, the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability.
Initial measurement
The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease payments 
made at or before the commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to dismantle and remove the 
underlying asset, or to restore the underlying asset or the site on which it is located at the end of the lease, less any lease incentives received.
The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments payable over the lease term, discounted at the 
incremental borrowing rate as the rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily determined. 
Variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate are included in the initial measurement of the lease liability and are 
initially measured using the index or rate as at the commencement date. Amounts expected to be payable by the Group under 
residual value guarantees are also included. Variable lease payments that are not included in the measurement of the lease liability 
are recognised in profit or loss in the period in which the event or condition that triggers payment occurs unless the costs are included 
in the carrying amount of another asset under another accounting standard.
The Group has applied judgement to determine the lease term for some lease contracts that include renewal options. The assessment 
of whether the Group is reasonably certain to exercise such options impacts the lease term, which significantly affects the value of 
lease liabilities and right-of-use assets recognised.
The payments related to leases are presented under cash flows from financing activities and cash flows from operating activities 
in the cash flow statement.
Subsequent measurement
After lease commencement, the Group values right-of-use assets using a cost model. Under the cost model, a right-of-use asset 
is measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment.
The lease liability is subsequently increased by the interest cost on the lease liability and decreased by lease payments made. It is 
re-measured to reflect changes in the lease term (using a revised discount rate); the assessment of a purchase option (using a revised 
discount rate); the amounts expected to be payable under residual value guarantees (using an unchanged discount rate); and future 
lease payments resulting from a change in an index or a rate used to determine those payments (using an unchanged discount rate).
The re-measurements are matched by adjustments to the right-of-use asset. Lease modifications may also prompt re-measurement 
of the lease liability unless they are determined to be separate leases.
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method, from the commencement date to the earlier of 
either the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. The estimated useful lives of right-of-use assets 
are determined on the same basis as those of property, plant and equipment. In addition, the right-of-use asset is reduced by 
impairment losses, if any, and adjusted for certain re-measurements of the lease liability.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
98
98
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

14. Leases continued
As lessee continued
Determining the lease term
Termination options are included in a number of property leases across the Group. These terms are used to maximise operational 
flexibility. At the commencement date of property leases, the Group determines the lease term to be the full term of the lease, assuming 
that any option to break or extend the lease is unlikely to be exercised. Leases will be revalued if it becomes likely that a break clause 
is to be exercised. In determining the likelihood of the exercise of a break option, management considers all facts and circumstances 
that create an economic incentive to exercise the termination option. For property leases, the following factors are the most relevant:
•	 The profitability of the leased store and future plans for the business.
•	 If there are any significant penalties to terminate (or not extend), the Group is typically reasonably certain to extend.
(i) Amounts recognised in the statement of financial position
Right-of-use assets
 
Land and
 buildings
£000
Plant and
 equipment
£000
Total
£000
2024
At 30 April 2023 (Restated)
64,703
669
65,372
Depreciation charge for the year
(17,949)
(275)
(18,224)
Additions to right-of-use assets
10,931
—
10,931
Effect of modifications to right-of-use assets
(1,059)
—
(1,059)
Derecognition of right-of-use assets
 (543)
—
 (543)
Impairment charge
 (3,394)
—
 (3,394)
Impairment reversals
 4,620 
—
 4,620 
At 5 May 2024
 57,309 
 394 
 57,703 
Land and
 buildings
£000
Plant and
equipment
£000
Total
£000
2023
At 1 May 2022 (Restated)
69,563
1,013
70,576
Depreciation charge for the year
(18,094)
(357)
(18,451)
Additions to right-of-use assets
17,217
13
17,230
Effect of modifications to right-of-use assets
(4,075)
—
(4,075)
Derecognition of right-of-use assets
(297)
—
(297)
Impairment charge
(2,173)
—
(2,173)
Impairment reversals
2,562 
—
2,562
At 30 April 2023 (restated)
 64,703
669
65,372
The total impairment charge/reversal and profit on disposal of right-of-use assets and liability is in Adjusting items.
Lease liabilities
Land and
 buildings
£000
Plant and
 equipment
£000
Total
£000
2024
At 30 April 2023 (Restated)
93,686
706
94,392
Additions to lease liabilities
8,929
—
8,929
Interest expense
3,962
22
3,984
Effect of modifications to lease liabilities
1,059
—
1,059
Lease payments
(26,151)
(304)
(26,455)
Disposals of lease liabilities
(4,080)
—
(4,080)
Foreign exchange movements
(69)
—
(69)
At 5 May 2024
77,336
424
77,760
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
99
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
99

14. Leases continued
(i) Amounts recognised in the statement of financial position continued
Lease liabilities continued
Land and
 buildings
£000
Plant and
 equipment
£000
Total
£000
2023
At 1 May 2022 (restated)
106,844
1,047
107,891
Additions to lease liabilities
15,051
15
15,066
Interest expense
4,107
33
4,140
Effect of modifications to lease liabilities
(4,075)
—
(4,075)
Lease payments
(26,991)
(389)
(27,380)
Disposals of lease liabilities
(1,402)
—
(1,402)
Foreign exchange movements
152
—
152
At 30 April 2023
93,686
706
94,392
Carrying value of leases included in the consolidated statement of financial position
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Current
 19,943 
19,626 
Non-current
 57,817 
74,766 
Total carrying value of leases
77,760 
 94,392 
Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted cash flows:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Less than one year
 23,446 
 27,163 
One to two years
 18,787 
 21,904 
Two to three years
 13,738
 17,225 
Three to four years
 9,968
 12,363
Four to five years
 6,574 
 8,771 
More than five years
 17,632 
 20,727 
Total undiscounted lease liabilities
 90,145 
 108,153 
(ii) Amounts recognised in the consolidated income statement
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated – 
Note 15)
£000
Depreciation charge on right-of-use assets (RoUA)
 18,224 
18,451 
Interest cost on lease liability
 3,984 
 4,140 
Profit on disposal of RoUA/lease liability
 (3,537)
 (1,105)
Foreign exchange difference on euro leases
 69 
 (152)
Additional impairment charge under IAS 36
(1,226) 
 3,564 
Operating lease rentals – hire of plant, equipment and motor vehicles
– Low-value leases
 362 
 371 
Total plant, equipment and motor vehicle operating lease rentals
 362 
 371 
Operating lease rentals – store leases
– Stores with variable lease rentals
 (434) 
 300 
– Concession leases (the landlord has substantial substitution rights)
 848 
 977 
– Low-value leases
 (11)
 13 
– Lease is expiring within 12 months or has rolling break clauses
 63 
 53 
– Lease has expired
 766 
 397 
– Variable lease payments as a result of COVID-19 concessions
 —
 (181)
Total store operating lease rentals
 1,232 
 1,559 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
100
100
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

14. Leases continued
(ii) Amounts recognised in the consolidated income statement continued
Depreciation of right-of-use asset by class:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated – 
Note 15)
£000
Land and buildings
 17,949 
 18,094 
Plant and equipment
 275 
 357 
Total right-of-use asset depreciation
 18,224 
 18,451 
15. Prior period restatements
FY23 prior period restatement
The FY23 financial statements included a prior year restatement which resulted in an increase to the impairment of right of use assets, 
following a correction to the allocation of central costs to each cash generating unit, which had previously been omitted from the calculations. 
This also resulted in a reduction in the depreciation charge as a result of the reduced net book value of the right of use assets.
FY24 prior period restatement
There were a number of stores where the lease had expired prior to the start of the FY24 financial period. The Group recognises 
a right‑of‑use asset and lease liability for such stores where it is likely that a new lease will be entered into, based on an estimate of the 
new lease terms, prior to final agreement of terms with the landlord. These stores had been subject to impairment as part of the FY23 prior 
period restatement described above. During the current period, the Directors have considered the allocation of impairment to these 
stores and concluded that impairment was incorrectly calculated in light of the modification of the lease. A gain on modification of the 
lease of £3,612k should have been recognised in the prior period, with a corresponding increase to right of use assets of £3,612k.
As a result, the FY22 closing impairment balance relating to right-of-use assets has been increased by £2,657k, the closing impairment 
balance relating to property, plant and equipment has been reduced by £628k and the closing impairment balance relating to intangible 
assets has been reduced by £60k. The adjustment to FY22 closing reserves is therefore £1,969k. There are further impacts due to 
impairment disposed of variance £(1,373)k, depreciation variance £1,596k and change in net book value of PPE £140k, all of these impacts 
total to £2,332k which is the opening adjustment seen in the statement of changes in equity.
In FY23, the net impairment charge has been reduced by £3,723k for right-of-use assets, £170k for property, plant and equipment and 
£70k for intangible assets. Therefore, the net increase to total profit before tax relating to FY23 impairment charges is £3,963k. 
Depreciation reduction due to impairment
As a result of the adjustments to right of use assets and impairment above, the net book value of fixed assets was higher at the start of 
FY23 than previously disclosed, resulting in the depreciation charge being understated. The FY22 closing accumulated depreciation has 
been increased by £1,516k relating to right of use assets, £67k relating to property, plant and equipment and £11k relating to intangible 
assets, with a corresponding decrease in retained earnings of £1,596k.
In FY23, the depreciation charge has increased by £3,033k relating to right of use assets, £100k relating to property, plant and equipment 
and £18k relating to intangible assets, reducing Adjusted profit before tax by £3,150k.
Adjustment related to closed stores
There were a number of stores closed prior to FY24, where property, plant and equipment had been correctly disposed of but corresponding 
depreciation had not been adjusted for when calculating the prior year restatement in the FY23 financial statements. 
In FY23, the depreciation charge related to property, plant and equipment has been increased by £591k and the depreciation charge 
related to intangible assets has been increased by £101k. Therefore, the net decrease to total profit in FY23 is £698k. 
Impairment reduction as a result of depreciation adjustment on disposed assets
As a result of the adjustments to right of use assets and depreciation above for closed stores, the net book value of fixed assets was lower 
at the start of FY23 than previously disclosed, resulting in the impairment charge being overstated. The FY22 closing accumulated impairment 
has been decreased by £1,603k relating to right of use assets, with a corresponding increase in retained earnings of £1,603k.
In FY23, the impairment charge has decreased by £230k relating to right of use assets, increasing Adjusted profit before tax by £230k.
Adjustment to opening balances
As part of the review of IFRS 16 balances during the period, the Directors identified adjustments to opening balances that were not 
required. These balances related to previous adjustments to the residual rent balance in the consolidated income statement following 
the IFRS 16 calculations. 
These adjustments resulted in an increase in the FY23 opening balances of £3,245k to the right of use assets brought forward and £3,245k 
decrease to the lease liability brought forward. In FY23, the depreciation charge associated with right of use assets has been increased 
by £578k, with a corresponding reduction in the rent charge in the consolidated income statement. The depreciation charge to the right 
of use asset has been reduced by £578k and the lease liability reduced by £578k in the consolidated statement of financial position. 
Impact on cash flow statement
These adjustments increase the ‘depreciation of property, plant and equipment’, ‘depreciation of right of use assets’ and ‘amortisation 
of intangible assets’ balance in the consolidated cash flow statement. However, there is no overall impact on ‘net increase in cash and 
cash equivalents’.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
101
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
101

15. Prior period restatements continued
FY24 prior period restatement continued
Corporation tax restatement
The above adjustments have resulted in restatements to the corporation tax charges, current tax assets/liabilities and the deferred tax 
asset. Refer to Notes 9 and 16 for restated tax disclosures. 
The following tables summarise the impact of the above restatements on the Group’s consolidated financial statements including the 
impact of current and deferred corporation tax. 
Summarised consolidated income statement
Per FY23
 financial
 statements
Right-of-use
 asset cost
 variance
Depreciation
 variance
Impairment
 disposed 
of variance
Impairment
 charge
 variance
Disposals
 depreciation
 reduction
 adjustment
IFRS 16
 adjustment
FY23
 restated
 balance
Income statement
Revenue
280,102
—
—
—
—
—
—
280,102
Cost of sales
(236,202)
3,612
(3,150)
230
3,963
(692)
—
(232,239)
Gross profit
43,900
3,612
(3,150)
230
3,963
(692)
—
47,863
Other operating income
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
Distribution expenses
(10,284)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(10,284)
Administrative expenses
(24,197)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(24,197)
Operating profit
9,427
3,612
(3,150)
230
3,963
(692)
—
13,390
Finance income 
227
—
—
—
—
—
—
227
Finance expense 
(4,648)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(4,648)
Profit before tax
5,006
3,612
(3,150)
230
3,963
(692)
—
8,969
Taxation
265
—
25
(42)
—
147
—
395
Profit after tax
5,271
3,612
(3,125)
188
3,963
(545)
—
9,364
Summarised consolidated statement of financial position
Per FY23
 financial
 statements
Right-of-use
 asset cost
variance
Depreciation
 variance
Impairment
 disposed 
of variance
Impairment 
charge 
variance
Disposals
 depreciation
 reduction
 adjustment
IFRS 16
 adjustment
FY23 
restated
 balance
Non-current assets
Intangible assets
916
—
(29)
—
130
(101)
—
916
Property, plant 
and equipment
11,733
—
(167)
—
798
(591)
—
11,773
Right of use assets
67,463
3,612
(4,549)
1,603
1,066
—
(3,823)
65,372
Other non-current Assets
4,854
—
40 
(199)
—
149
—
4,844
84,966
3,612
(4,705)
1,404
1,994
(543)
(543)
82,905
Current assets
52,293
—
—
—
—
—
52,293
Total assets
137,259
3,612
(4,705)
1,404
1,994
(543)
(3,823)
135,198
Liabilities
Current lease liabilities 
(23,449)
—
—
—
—
—
3,823
(19,626)
Other current liabilities 
(36,092)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(36,092)
Non-current lease liabilities 
(74,766)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(74,766)
Other non-current 
lease liabilities 
(1,298)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(1,298)
Total liabilities
(135,605)
—
—
—
—
—
3,823
(131,782)
Net assets
1,654
3,612
(4,705)
1,404
1,994
(543)
—
3,416
Equity attributable to equity 
holders of the Parent
Retained earnings
(34,959)
— 
(1,579)
1,217 
(1,969)
—
— 
(37,290)
Retained earnings in year
5,271
3,612 
(3,126)
187 
3,963 
(543)
— 
9,364
Other reserves
31,342
—
—
—
—
—
—
31,342
Total equity
1,654
3,612
(4,705)
1,404
1,994
(543)
—
3,416
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
102
102
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

15. Prior period restatements continued
Summarised consolidated statement of changes in equity
Attributable to equity holders of the Company
 
Share
capital
£000
Share
premium
£000
Merger
reserve
£000
Share-based
payment
reserve
£000
Hedging
reserve 1
£000
Retained
earnings
£000
Total
equity
£000
Reported balance at 30 April 2023
625
28,322
(54)
2,780
(331)
(29,688)
1,654
Cumulative adjustment
—
—
—
—
—
1,762
1,762
Restated balance at 30 April 2023
625
28,322
(54)
2,780 
(331) 
(27,926)
3,416 
16. Deferred tax assets
Recognised deferred tax assets
Deferred tax assets are attributable to the following:
 
Assets
Liabilities
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated 1)
£000
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated 1)
£000
Property, plant and equipment
2,785
2,866
—
—
Leases
980
1,362
—
—
Temporary timing differences
332
354
—
—
Financial assets/(liabilities)
—
262
(61)
—
Tax assets/(liabilities)
4,097
4,844
(61)
—
Movement in deferred tax during the year
 
Fixed assets
£000
Leases
£000
Temporary
timing
differences 
£000
Financial
assets/
(liabilities)
£000
Total
£000
At 30 April 2023 (Restated1)
2,866
1,362
354
262
4,844
Adjustment in respect of prior years
785
16
—
—
801
Deferred tax charge to profit and loss
(866)
(398)
(22)
—
(1,286)
Deferred tax credit in equity profit and loss
—
—
—
(323)
(323)
At 5 May 2024
2,785
980
332
(61)
4,036
1	 The FY23 deferred tax asset has been restated to reflect the tax impact of the restatements documented in Note 15.
Movement in deferred tax during the prior year
 
Fixed assets
£000
Leases
£000
Temporary
timing
differences 
£000
Financial
assets/
(liabilities)
£000
Total
£000
At 1 May 2022
2,728
1,645
195
—
4,568
Adjustment in respect of prior years
(369)
—
—
(598)
(967)
Deferred tax credit/(charge) to profit and loss (Restated1)
507
(283)
159
—
383
Deferred tax credit in equity profit and loss
—
—
—
860
860
At 30 April 2023 
2,866
1,362
354
262
4,844
1	 The FY23 deferred tax asset has been restated to reflect the tax impact of the restatements documented in Note 15.
Tax losses carried forward for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised total £nil (FY23: £9,273k).
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
103
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
103

17. Inventories
Accounting policy
Inventories comprise stocks of finished goods for resale and are valued on a weighted average cost basis and carried at the lower of 
cost and net realisable value. Cost includes all direct expenditure and other attributable costs incurred in bringing inventories to their 
present location and condition.
The process of purchasing inventories may include the use of cash flow hedges to manage foreign exchange risk. Where hedge 
accounting applies, an adjustment is applied such that the cost of stock reflects the hedged exchange rate.
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Gross stock value
28,401 
31,278 
Less: stock provisions for shrinkage and obsolescence
(1,932)
(1,037)
Goods for resale net of provisions
26,469 
30,241 
Stock in transit
4,885 
3,200 
Inventory
31,354 
33,441 
The cost of inventories recognised as an expense during the period was £120.5m (FY23: £119.1m).
Stock was valued at £31.4m at the end of the period (FY23: £33.4m), a decrease of £2.0m. Tighter stock management supported a 
planned reduction in our period end closing forward cover and supports lower markdown activity in FY25. The stock value reflects higher 
stock on water than we would have expected because of the extra transit time from China due to the Red Sea challenges.
Stock provisions
The Group makes provisions in relation to stock quantities, due to potential stock losses not yet reflected in the accounting records, 
commonly referred to as unrecognised shrinkage, and in relation to stock value, where the net realisable value of an item is expected 
to be lower than its cost, due to obsolescence. 
Shrinkage provision
During FY24, full four wall counts were performed in 518 stores during two waves of counts – 199 stores were counted between August and 
September with a further 335 stores counted (including 23 recounted stores) between March and May. Through these counts, the Group 
established that its accounting records reflected the actual quantities of stock in stores. This process also provides the Group with an 
indication of the typical percentage of stock loss, which is used to calculate, by extrapolation, unrecognised shrinkage at the balance 
sheet date. The stock records were updated to reflect the results of the stock counts, however, due to the estate being counted 
throughout the year compared to FY23 where all stores were counted near the year end, the unrecognised shrinkage provision has 
increased to £1.1m (FY23: £0.4m). The provision relates to store stock with a value of £20.6m (FY23: £20.9m)
Obsolescence provision
The Group’s inventory does not comprise a large proportion of stock with a ‘shelf life’. Stock lines which are slow selling because they 
have been less successful than planned, or which have sold successfully and become fragmented as they reach the natural end of their 
planned selling period, are usually discounted and sold during ‘sale’ events, for example the January sale. This stock is referred to as 
terminal stock.
During FY24 the Group held slightly more terminal stock than the prior period. Consequently, the obsolescence provision has increased 
to £0.8m (FY23: £0.6m).
The Group has also considered the impact of customer preferences and ESG considerations on potential stock obsolescence, and these 
factors are not deemed to have a material impact on the level of provision required.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
104
104
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

18. Trade and other receivables
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Current
 
 
Trade receivables
2,626 
2,864 
Other receivables
506 
359 
Prepayments
5,252
4,284 
Trade and other receivables
8,384
 7,507 
Trade receivables are attributable to sales which have been paid for by credit card pending receipt into the Company’s bank account 
and are classified as finance assets at amortised cost. The trade receivables balance is primarily made up of aforementioned pending 
credit card receipts of £2.3m (FY23: £2.4m). No credit is provided to customers. The individual value and nature of trade receivables is such 
that no material credit losses occur; therefore, no loss allowance has been recorded at the period end (FY23: £nil). 
Other receivables relate to stock on water deposits paid and other accounts payable debit balances. Prepayments relate to prepaid 
property costs and other expenses. 
19. Cash and cash equivalents
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Cash and cash equivalents 
1,619
10,196
Total
1,619
10,196
The Group’s cash and cash equivalents are denominated in the following currencies:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Sterling
1,142
8,208
Euro
397
1,949
US dollar
80
39
Cash and cash equivalents
1,619
10,196
At 5 May 2024, the Group held net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £1.6m (FY23: £10.2m). This comprised cash of £1.6m (FY23: £10.2m).
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
105
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
105

20. Borrowings
Accounting policy
Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts, loan notes and other loans are recognised in the balance sheet at amortised cost. 
Finance charges associated with arranging non-equity funding are recognised in the income statement over the life of the facility. 
All other borrowing costs are recognised in the income statement in accordance with the effective interest rate method. A summary 
of the Group’s objectives, policies, procedures and strategies with regard to financial instruments and capital management can be 
found in Note 25. At 5 May 2024 and 30 April 2023 all borrowings were denominated in Sterling.
For the period ended 5 May 2024, the Group’s bank facilities comprised of a revolving credit facility of £20.0m (FY23: £30.0m) expiring on 
30 November 2025. During the period, the facility was extended by a year and reduced in size by £10.0m on the request of the Directors. 
The nature of the covenants associated with the facility remained consistent throughout both periods presented. The levels of the covenant 
measures were amended on 18 March 2024 (see Note 1). None of the Group’s cash and cash equivalents (FY23: £nil) are held by the trustee 
of the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust in relation to the share schemes for employees.
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated)
£000
Non-current liabilities
 
 
Lease liabilities
57,817
74,766
Non-current liabilities
57,817
74,766
Current liabilities
 
 
Lease liabilities
19,943
19,626
Current liabilities
19,943
19,626
Reconciliation of borrowings to cash flows arising from financing activities
 
FY24
£000
FY23
(Restated)
£000
Borrowings at start of the period 
94,392
107,891
Changes from financing cash flows
 
 
Payment of lease liabilities (capital)
 (22,471)
 (23,250)
Payment of lease liabilities (interest)
 (3,984)
 (4,130)
Proceeds from loans and borrowings1
 6,000 
 4,000 
Repayment of bank borrowings1
 (6,000)
 (4,000)
Total changes from financing cash flows
 (26,455)
 (27,380)
Other changes
 
 
Addition of lease liabilities
 9,988 
 10,991 
Disposal of lease liabilities
 (4,080)
 (1,402)
The effect of changes in foreign exchange rates
 (69)
 152 
Interest expense
 3,984 
 4,140 
Total other changes
 9,823 
 13,881 
Borrowings at end of the period (excluding overdrafts)
77,760
94,392
1	 £6.0m was drawn under the Group’s RCF from 28 June 2023 to 29 November 2023. 
Net debt reconciliation
 
FY24
£000
FY23 
(Restated)
£000
Net debt (excluding unamortised debt costs)
 
 
Cash and cash equivalents
(1,619)
(10,196)
Net bank cash
(1,619)
(10,196)
Non-IFRS 16 lease liabilities
89
268
Non-IFRS 16 net cash
(1,530)
(9,928)
IFRS 16 lease liabilities
77,760
94,392
Net debt including IFRS 16 lease liabilities
76,230
84,464
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
106
106
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

21. Trade and other payables
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Current
 
 
Trade payables
18,081 
22,960 
Other tax and social security
3,525 
2,610 
Accrued expenses
8,280 
8,909 
Trade and other payables
29,886
34,479 
Trade payables principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and operating costs. 
The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their fair value.
Accrued expenses comprise various accrued property costs, payroll costs and other expenses, including £166k (FY23: £484k) of deferred 
income in relation to the customer loyalty scheme. The Group’s loyalty scheme was closed to new members on 30 March 2024 with loyalty 
vouchers (and thus liability) expiring on 30 June 2024.
The Group has net US dollar denominated trade and other payables of £7.0m (FY23: £6.6m).
22. Provisions
Accounting policy
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that the Group 
will be required to settle that obligation. Provisions are the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at the 
end of the reporting period and are discounted to present value where the effect is material.
 
HMRC VAT
£000
Property
£000
Total
£000
At 30 April 2023
514
1,349
1,863
Released 
(367)
(24)
(391)
Utilised
—
(453)
(453)
At 5 May 2024
147
872
1,019
Maturity analysis of cash flows:
HMRC VAT
£000
Property
£000
Total
£000
Due in less than one year
 147 
 396 
 543
Due between one and five years
—
476
 476 
Due in more than five years
— 
—
 — 
Total
 147 
 872 
 1,019 
Property provision
A dilapidation provision is recognised when there is a future obligation relating to the maintenance of leasehold property. The provision 
is based on management’s best estimate of the obligation which forms part of the Group’s unavoidable cost of meeting its obligations 
under the lease contracts. Key uncertainties are estimates of amounts due. 
HMRC VAT provision
HMRC initiated a VAT review in August 2022 in respect of a four-year period (FY19 to FY22). The review is ongoing and therefore a provision 
of £147k (FY23: £514k) is recognised in respect of the potential liability. 
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
107
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
107

23. Defined contribution pension plans
Accounting policy
A defined contribution pension plan is a post-employment benefit plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a 
separate entity and will have no obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension 
plans are recognised as an expense in the profit and loss account in the period during which services are rendered by employees.
The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme. The pension cost for the period represents contributions paid and 
payable by the Group to the scheme for services rendered by employees during the period and amounted to £1,066k (FY23: £890k).
At the end of the period contributions of £507k (FY23: £243k) were outstanding.
24. Share capital and reserves
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:
•	 Share premium account: Proceeds received in excess of the nominal value of shares issued, net of any transaction costs.
•	 Hedging reserve: Cumulative gains and losses on hedging instruments deemed effective in cash flow hedges.
•	 Merger reserve: Created in 2018 on the formation of TheWorks.co.uk plc, it represents the difference between the cost of the investment 
in The Works Investment Limited (and its subsidiaries, The Works Stores Limited and The Works Online Limited) of £51,499,891 and the 
nominal value of the ordinary shares issued in exchange of £109.
•	 Share-based payment reserve: Represents the cumulative charges to income under IFRS 2 share-based payments on all equity-settled 
share options granted, net of exercises.
•	 Retained earnings: All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised elsewhere.
 
FY24
Number
000
FY23
Number
000
Share capital
 
 
Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 1p:
 
 
At the start of the period
62,500
62,500
Issued in the period
—
—
At the end of the period
62,500
62,500
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Share capital
 
 
At 1 May 2022, 30 April 2023 and 5 May 2024 
625
625
Share premium
 
 
At 1 May 2022, 30 April 2023 and 5 May 2024 
28,322
28,322
During the period, the Employee Benefit Trust purchased £260k (FY23: £473k) of the Company’s shares for the purpose of satisfying future 
employee share-based payment awards.
Investment in own shares
At 5 May 2024, the Employee Benefit Trust held 1,102,801 (FY23: 1,240,577) of the Company’s shares.
The Trust has waived any entitlement to the receipt of dividends in respect of its holding of the Company’s ordinary shares. The market 
value of these shares at 5 May 2024 was £269,083 (FY23: £390,161). In the current period, 700,959 (FY23: 1,408,086) were repurchased and 
transferred into the Trust, with 838,735 (FY23: 167,491) reissued on exercise of share options.
25. Financial instruments
Accounting policy 
Non-derivative financial assets
Non-derivative financial assets comprise trade and other receivables and cash and cash equivalents. The Group classifies all its 
non-derivative financial assets as financial assets at amortised cost. Financial assets at amortised cost are initially measured at fair 
value plus directly attributable transaction costs, except for trade and other receivables without a significant financing component 
that are initially measured at transaction price. Subsequent to initial recognition, non-derivative financial assets are carried at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method, subject to impairment.
At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost are credit impaired. A financial asset 
is ‘credit impaired’ when one or more events that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset 
have occurred. The Group measures loss allowances at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit loss.
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand, at bank and on short-term deposit for less than three months. Bank overdrafts, 
within borrowings, that are repayable on demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash management are included as a 
component of cash and cash equivalents for the purposes of the cash flow statement.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
108
108
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

25. Financial instruments continued
Accounting policy continued
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Non-derivative financial liabilities comprise bank borrowings and trade and other payables. Non-derivative financial liabilities are 
initially recognised at fair value, less any directly attributable transaction costs, and subsequently stated at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method.
Derivative financial instruments
Derivative financial instruments are mandatorily categorised as fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL), except to the extent they 
are part of a designated hedging relationship and classified as cash flow hedging instruments. The Group utilises foreign currency 
derivative contracts to manage the foreign exchange risk on future US dollar denominated purchases. 
Gains and losses in respect of foreign exchange derivative financial instruments that are not part of an effective hedging relationship 
are recognised within cost of sales and net finance expense.
Cash flow hedges
When a derivative is designated as a cash flow hedging instrument, the effective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative 
is recognised in other comprehensive income (OCI) and accumulated in the hedging reserve. The effective portion of changes in the 
fair value of the derivative that is recognised in OCI is limited to the cumulative change in fair value of the hedged item, determined 
on a present value basis, from inception of the hedge. Any ineffective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is 
recognised immediately in profit or loss.
The Group designates only the change in fair value of the spot element of forward exchange contracts as the hedging instrument in 
cash flow hedging relationships and applies a hedge ratio of 1:1. The change in fair value of the forward element of forward exchange 
contracts (forward points) is separately accounted for as a cost of hedging and recognised in the hedging reserve separately as 
costs of hedging.
When foreign exchange hedged forecast transactions subsequently result in the recognition of inventory, the amount accumulated 
in the hedging reserve and the cost of hedging reserve is included directly in the initial cost of the inventory.
Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging transferred to the cost of inventory in the year were £(290)k (FY23: £174k).
If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting or the hedging instrument is sold, expires, is terminated or is exercised, 
then hedge accounting is discontinued prospectively. When hedge accounting for cash flow hedges is discontinued, the amount that 
has been accumulated in the hedging reserve remains in equity until it is included in the cost of inventory on its initial recognition.
If the hedged future cash flows are no longer expected to occur, then the amounts that have been accumulated in the hedging 
reserve and the cost of hedging reserve are immediately reclassified to profit or loss.
Fair value estimation
The techniques applied in determining the fair values of financial assets and liabilities are disclosed below.
Foreign currency
The consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the functional currency of the Group.
Transactions in currencies other than the entity’s functional currency (foreign currencies) are recognised at the rates of exchange 
prevailing on the dates of the transactions. The majority of currency transactions that are not in the functional currency of the trading 
entity relate to inventory purchases. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the 
translation at year-end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income 
statement within cost of sales, except when deferred in other comprehensive income as qualifying cash flow hedges. Foreign currency 
gains and losses are reported on a net basis.
The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk, most significantly to the US dollar as a result of sourcing certain products which are paid 
for predominantly in US dollars. The Group hedges these exposures using forward foreign exchange contracts and hedge accounting is 
applied when the requirements of IFRS 9 are met, which include that a forecast transaction must be ‘highly probable’. The Group has 
applied judgement in assessing whether the forecast purchases remain ‘highly probable’.
The Group’s policy is to fully hedge the forecast US dollar purchase requirements nine months in advance, and approximately 50% of the 
requirement for the period 9 to 12 months in advance (up to 100% may be hedged but there is no requirement to do so). Between 12 and 24 
months in advance of purchase requirements up to 50% may be hedged. As a result of this progressive strategy, reducing the supply 
pipeline of inventory, should this occur, does not immediately lead to over-hedging and the disqualification of ‘highly probable’. If the 
forecast transactions were no longer expected to occur, any accumulated gain or loss on the hedging instruments would be immediately 
reclassified to profit or loss.
Financial risk management
The Board has overall responsibility for managing risks and uncertainties and these are reviewed on an ongoing basis. The principal 
financial risks faced by the Group include market risk, currency risk, cash flow interest rate risk, credit risk and liquidity risk. In order to 
manage the Group’s exposure to these risks, in particular the Group’s exposure to currency risk, the Group enters into forward foreign 
currency contracts. No transactions in derivatives are undertaken for speculative purposes.
Further details of the Group’s approach to managing risk are included in the principal risks and uncertainties section of the Strategic 
report and in the Corporate governance report.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
109
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
109

25. Financial instruments continued
Financial risk management continued
(a) Market risk
The Group’s activities expose it to two types of market risk, being currency risk and cash flow interest rate risk. The Group’s policies 
for managing currency risk and interest rate risk are set out below.
(i) Currency risk
The Group is exposed to transactional foreign currency risk to the extent that there is a mismatch between the currencies in which sales, 
purchases, receivables and borrowings are denominated. A significant proportion of the Group’s retail products are procured from 
overseas suppliers in transactions denominated in US dollars.
The Group uses foreign currency derivative contracts and US dollar denominated cash balances to manage the foreign exchange risk 
on US dollar denominated inventory purchases.
As described above, the Group takes a prudent, but flexible, approach to hedging the risk of exchange rate fluctuations. At 5 May 2024, 
the Group held forward contracts with a nominal value of $58.5m (FY23: $40.0m), $45.5m of which matures within FY25 and $14.0m within 
the first six months of FY26. These contracts have an average forward rate of $1.2589 (FY23: $1.2183).
Exposure to currency risk
The carrying amounts of the Group’s foreign currency denominated monetary assets and monetary liabilities at the reporting date are 
as follows:
 
Liabilities
Assets
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
US dollar
7,002 
6,552 
80 
39 
Euro
342 
352 
615 
1,958 
Currency sensitivity analysis
The Group is exposed to the US dollar and, to a significantly lesser extent, the euro.
The following table details the Group’s sensitivity to a 10% increase or decrease in sterling against the relevant foreign currencies. 10% 
represents management’s assessment of the reasonably possible change in foreign exchange rates. The sensitivity analysis includes only 
outstanding foreign currency denominated monetary items and adjusts their translation at the period end for a 10% change in foreign 
currency rates. A positive number below indicates an increase in profit and other equity where sterling strengthens 10% against the relevant 
currency. For a 10% weakening of sterling against the relevant currency, there would be a comparable impact on the profit and other 
equity, and the balances below would be negative. 
 
USD impact
Euro impact
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Profit/(loss) for the period
629
592
(25) 
(146)
This is mainly attributable to the exposure outstanding on US dollar and euro cash balances held, trade payables and other accruals 
at the reporting date.
The sensitivity analysis above represents the inherent foreign exchange risk as at the year end, but is not reflective of the exposure, 
and therefore the profit impact, to foreign currency exchange movements during the year.
(ii) Interest rate risk
The Group is also exposed to the effects of fluctuations in the interest rate on its banking facility. The sensitivity analysis below has been 
determined based on an increase in the interest rate of 1.0% on the average cash balances throughout the year.
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Variable rate instruments (100 bp increase)
59 
132
Variable rate instruments (100 bp decrease)
(59)
(132)
(b) Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual 
obligations. The Group does not offer any credit to customers; therefore, the credit risk with respect to exposure to customers is low.
The Group does not have any significant credit risk exposure to any single counterparty or any group of counterparties having similar 
characteristics. The Group defines counterparties as having similar characteristics if they are related entities.
The credit risk on liquid funds and derivative financial instruments is limited because the counterparties are banks with high credit ratings 
assigned by international credit rating agencies.
The carrying amount of the financial assets recorded in the financial statements represents the Group’s and the Company’s exposure 
to credit risk.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
110
110
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

25. Financial instruments continued
Financial risk management continued
(c) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting the obligations associated with its financial liabilities that are 
settled by delivering cash or another financial asset.
The Group manages liquidity risk by maintaining adequate reserves, banking facilities and reserve borrowing facilities, by continuously 
monitoring forecast and actual cash flows, and by matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities.
(d) Capital management
The Group’s objective when managing capital (which is deemed to be share capital and borrowings), is to maximise the return on net 
invested capital while maintaining its ongoing ability to operate and guarantee adequate returns for shareholders and benefits for other 
stakeholders, within a sustainable financial structure. The Group monitors its gearing ratio on a regular basis and makes appropriate 
decisions in light of the current economic conditions and strategic objectives of the Group.
There were no changes in the Group’s approach to capital management during the period. The Group does not have any externally 
imposed capital requirements. The funding requirements of the Group are met by cash generation from trading and the utilisation of 
external borrowings.
The following tables detail the Group’s remaining contractual maturity for its financial assets and liabilities with agreed repayment 
periods. The tables have been drawn up based on the undiscounted cash flows, excluding interest, based on the earliest date on 
which the Group can be required to pay.
Contractual maturity of financial liabilities
 
Within 1 year
£000
1-5 years
£000
5+ years
£000
Total
£000
At 5 May 2024
 
 
 
 
Non-derivative
Non-interest bearing
27,214 
— 
— 
27,214 
Lease liabilities (undiscounted cash flows)
23,446 
49,067 
17,632 
90,145 
Derivatives
Forward currency contracts
64 
— 
— 
64 
 
50,724 
49,067 
17,632 
117,423 
At 30 April 2023
 
 
 
 
Non-derivative
Non-interest bearing
31,950 
760 
538 
33,248 
Lease liabilities (undiscounted cash flows)
27,163 
60,263 
20,727 
108,153 
Derivatives
Forward currency contracts
1,048 
— 
— 
1,048 
 
60,161 
61,023 
21,265 
142,449 
Hedge accounting 
The Group ensures that hedge accounting relationships are aligned with the Group’s risk management objectives and strategy 
and applies a qualitative and forward-looking approach to assessing hedge effectiveness.
The Group determines the existence of an economic relationship between the hedging instrument and the hedged item based 
on the currency, amount and timing of their respective cash flows. The Group assesses whether the derivative designated in each 
hedging relationship is expected to be, and has been, effective in offsetting cash flows of the hedged item using the hypothetical 
derivative method.
In these hedge relationships, the main sources of ineffectiveness are:
•	 The effect of counterparties and the Group’s own credit risk on the fair value of the forward foreign exchange contracts, which is not 
reflected in the change in the fair value of the hedged cash flows attributable to the change in exchange rates.
•	 Changes in the timing of the hedged transactions.
Fair value measurements
Financial instruments carried at fair value are measured by reference to the following fair value hierarchy, based on the degree to which 
the fair value is observable:
•	 Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
•	 Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable 
for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices).
•	 Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not 
based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).
Derivative financial instruments are carried at fair value under a Level 2 valuation method. All other financial instruments carried at fair 
value are measured using the Level 1 valuation method.
There were no transfers between the levels during the current or prior year.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
111
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
111

25. Financial instruments continued
Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of derivative financial instruments at the balance sheet date is as follows:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Net derivative financial instruments
 
 
Foreign exchange contracts
242
(1,048)
Classification of financial instruments
The table below shows the classification of financial assets and liabilities as at 5 May 2024.
The fair value of financial instruments has been assessed as approximating to their carrying value.
 
Mandatorily
at FVTPL
£000
Cash flow 
hedging
 instruments
£000
Financial 
assets at
 amortised 
cost
£000
Other 
financial
 liabilities
£000
At 5 May 2024
 
 
 
 
Financial assets measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Derivative financial instruments
—
306
—
—
Financial assets not measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Trade and other receivables
—
—
8,384
—
Cash and cash equivalents
—
—
1,619
—
Financial liabilities measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Derivative financial instruments
—
(64)
—
—
Financial liabilities not measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Lease liabilities
—
—
—
(77,760)
Trade and other payables
—
—
—
(29,886)
—
242
10,003
(107,646)
 
Mandatorily
at FVTPL
£000
Cash flow 
hedging
 instruments
£000
Financial 
assets at
 amortised 
cost
£000
Other 
financial
 liabilities
£000
At 30 April 2023
 
 
 
 
Financial assets measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Derivative financial instruments
—
—
—
—
Financial assets not measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Trade and other receivables
—
—
7,507
—
Cash and cash equivalents
—
—
10,196
—
Financial liabilities measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Derivative financial instruments
—
(1,048)
—
—
Financial liabilities not measured at fair value
 
 
 
 
Lease liabilities
—
—
—
(94,392)
Trade and other payables
—
—
—
(34,479)
—
(1,048)
17,703
(128,871)
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
112
112
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

26. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements
Accounting policy
The Group operates equity-settled share-based compensation plans, granting awards that contain both service and performance 
conditions (both market and non-market based).
Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The cost of the awards to employees is 
expensed to the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity, on a straight-line basis over the vesting 
period of the award. The total income statement charge is based on the Company’s estimate of the number of share awards that 
will eventually vest in accordance with the vesting conditions. Any revision to estimates is recognised in the income statement, with 
a corresponding adjustment to equity.
During FY24, the Group had three (FY23: three) share-based payment schemes, which are described below.
TheWorks.co.uk Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
Further details of the Group’s LTIP arrangements are included in the Directors’ remuneration report. The LTIP rules provide for the grant 
of performance related and restricted awards. 
The LTIP awards are subject to a three-year vesting period and will usually only vest following the satisfaction of performance conditions. 
Vested shares will not be released until the end of an additional holding period of two years beginning on the vesting date. Performance 
measures under the LTIP are based on financial measures. For FY24, the vesting conditions require three years’ service from the grant 
date, the achievement of an EBITDA target and a share price target (FY23 awards: three years’ service from the grant date and the 
achievement of an EBITDA target and a share price target).
Restricted stock awards (RSA)
Restricted stock awards have previously been granted to certain employees, with a three-year vesting period. Restricted share awards 
are not subject to performance conditions.
Save As You Earn Scheme (SAYE)
A Save As You Earn Scheme is established which is a UK tax-qualified scheme under which eligible employees (including Directors) may 
save up to a maximum monthly limit of £250 (as determined by the Remuneration Committee) over a period of three years. Participants 
are granted an option to acquire shares at up to a 20% discount to the price as at the date of grant. The number of shares under option 
is that which can be acquired at that price using savings made.
 
LTIP
RSA
SAYE
Number of share options
 
 
Outstanding at 30 April 2023
 4,529,621 
 2,363,750 
 1,762,350 
Granted
 2,716,687 
 856,250 
 1,416,375 
Forfeited
 (2,247,717)
 (1,007,599)
 (1,125,711)
Lapsed
 (847,458)
—
—
Exercised
—
 (830,920)
—
Outstanding at 5 May 2024
 4,151,133 
 1,381,481 
 2,053,014 
 
LTIP
RSA
SAYE
Weighted average exercise price (£)
 
 
Outstanding at 30 April 2023
—
—
 0.43
Granted
—
—
—
Forfeited
—
—
 0.49 
Lapsed
—
—
 0.58 
Exercised
—
—
—
Outstanding at 5 May 2024
—
—
0.40
Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)
 3.88 
 2.49 
 2.30 
The exercise prices of outstanding share options as at 5 May 2024 range from £0.33 to £0.47.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
113
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report
113

26. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements continued 
Save As You Earn Scheme (SAYE) continued
Fair value of awards
The fair value of awards granted during the current and prior periods have been measured using the Monte Carlo simulation model for 
LTIP awards and the Black-Scholes model for SAYE, assuming the inputs below.
FY24
FY23
LTIP
SAYE
LTIP
SAYE
Number of awards granted
833,344
1,416,375
795,909
2,349,307
Fair value at grant date
£0.15
£0.06
£0.09
£0.06
Share price at grant date*
£0.39
£0.35
£0.33
£0.36
Exercise price*
£0.01
£0.28
£0.01
£0.29
Expected volatility
62%
62%
70%
50%
Expected term (years)
2–3
3
2–3
3
Risk-free interest rate
4.7%
4.6%
3.1%
2.8%
*	 The exercise price for SAYE awards is set at a 20% discount to an average market price determined in accordance with scheme rules. The share price at 
the grant date is the closing price on the grant date. The outstanding SAYE awards as at 5 May 2024 have an exercise price ranging from £0.28 to £0.55.
Expense recognised in the income statement
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
LTIP 
(308) 
 275 
RSA 
84
 199 
SAYE 
 27 
 54 
Total IFRS 2 (credit)/charge
(197) 
 528 
27. Capital commitments
At 5 May 2024 the Group had capital commitments of £260k (FY23: £368k).
28. Related party transactions
Balances and transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation 
and are not disclosed in this note. 
Transactions with key management personnel
The key management personnel of the Group comprise The Works.co.uk plc Board of Directors and the Group’s Operating Board. Further 
details of Director’s remuneration are set out in the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 57 to 66.
The compensation of key management personnel (including the Directors) is as follows:
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Key management remuneration – including social security costs
2,982
 3,132 
Pension contributions
 116 
 184 
LTIP – including social security costs
(351)
 313 
Total 
2,747
 3,629 
Further details on the compensation of key management personnel who are Directors are provided in the Group’s Directors’ 
remuneration report.
29. Subsidiary undertakings
The results of all subsidiary undertakings are included in the consolidated financial statements. The principal place of business and the 
registered office addresses for the subsidiaries are the same as for the Company.
Company
Active/
dormant
Direct/
indirect control
Registered
number
Class of
shares held
Ownership
The Works Investments Limited
Active
Direct
09073458
Ordinary
100%
The Works Stores Limited
Active
Indirect
06557400
Ordinary
100%
The Works Online Limited
Active
Indirect
08040244
Ordinary
100%
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
114
114
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
(Forming part of the financial statements)

 
Note
FY24
£000
FY23 
£000
Fixed assets
 
 
Investment
33
 36,918 
 38,377 
 
 36,918
 38,377 
Current assets
Trade and other receivables
34
 23 
 7 
 
 23 
 7 
Total assets
36,941
 38,384 
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
35
 4,706 
 8,986 
Total liabilities
 4,706 
 8,986 
Net assets
 32,235 
 29,398 
Share capital
36
 625 
 625 
Share premium
36
 28,322 
 28,322 
Share-based payment reserve
 2,583 
 2,780 
Retained earnings
 705 
 (2,329)
Total equity
 32,235 
 29,398 
Accompanying notes that form part of these financial statements are on pages 117 to 120.
These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 1 October 2024 and were signed on its behalf by:
Rosie Fordham
Chief Financial Officer
Company registered number: 11325534
Company statement of financial position
As at 5 May 2024
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
115
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

 
Share capital
£000
Share premium
£000
Share-based
 payment reserve
 £000
Retained 
earnings
£000
Total equity
£000
Reported balance at 1 May 2022 
 625 
 28,322 
 2,252 
 19,893 
 51,092 
Total comprehensive expense for the period
Loss for the period
—
—
—
(20,257)
(20,257)
Total comprehensive expense for the period
—
—
—
(20,257)
(20,257)
Transactions with owners of the Company
Share-based payment charge
—
—
528
528
528
Dividend
—
—
—
(1,492)
(1,492)
Own shares purchased by Employee Benefit Trust 
—
—
—
(473)
(473)
Transactions with owners of the Company
—
—
528
(1,965)
(1,437)
Balance at 30 April 2023
 625 
 28,322 
 2,780 
 (2,329)
 29,398 
Total comprehensive expense for the period
Profit for the period1
 —
 —
 —
3,294 
3,294 
Total comprehensive expense for the period
 —
 — 
 —
3,294 
3,294 
Transactions with owners of the Company
Share-based payment charge
 — 
 — 
 (197)
 — 
 (197)
Dividend
 — 
 — 
 —
 —
 —
Own shares purchased by Employee Benefit Trust 
 —
 —
 —
(260)
(260)
Transactions with owners of the Company
 — 
 — 
 (197)
 (260)
 (457)
Balance at 5 May 2024
 625 
 28,322 
 2,583 
 705 
 32,235 
1	 Profit for the year includes a loan waiver of £5,549k in respect of a loan due to The Works Stores Limited from TheWorks.co.uk plc.
Accompanying notes that form part of these financial statements are on pages 117 to 120.
Company statement of changes in equity
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
116

30. Accounting policies
(a) Basis of preparation
The Company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (FRS 101). In preparing these financial statements, the Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure 
requirements of UK-adopted International Accounting Standards (Adopted IFRSs) but makes amendments where necessary to comply 
with Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 disclosure exemptions has been taken. The financial 
statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention.
An Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) operated on the Company’s behalf is acting as an agent of the Company; therefore, the assets and 
liabilities of the EBT are aggregated into the Company balance sheet and shares held by the EBT in the Company are presented as 
a deduction from equity.
The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for at least 
12 months from the date of issue of these financial statements. Accordingly, the financial statements have been prepared on a going concern 
basis. Refer to Note 1(b)(i) for further information regarding the basis of preparation.
Principal accounting policies
The principal accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these financial statements.
(b) Income statement
The Company made a profit after tax of £3.3m for the period relating to the waiver of an intercompany loan and the impairment of 
the investment balance (FY23: loss of £20.3m). As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the income statement of the 
Company is not presented as part of the financial statements.
In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures:
•	 Cash flow statement and related notes.
•	 Comparative period reconciliations for share capital.
•	 Transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries.
•	 Capital management.
•	 The effects of new but not yet effective IFRS.
•	 The compensation of key management personnel.
As the consolidated financial statements include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has also taken the exemptions under FRS 101 
available in respect of the following disclosures:
•	 IFRS 2 share-based payments in respect of Group-settled share-based payments.
(c) Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of financial statements requires the Company to make estimates and judgements that affect the application of policies 
and reported amounts.
Critical judgements represent key decisions made by management in the application of the Company accounting policies. Where a significant 
risk of materially different outcomes exists due to the requirement to make assumptions in arriving at a figure, this will represent a key source 
of estimation uncertainty.
Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations 
of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates.
The estimates which have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities within the next 
12 months are discussed below.
Key sources of estimation uncertainty which are material to the financial statements are described in the context of the matters to which 
they relate in the following notes:
Description
Note
Page
Going concern
1(b)(i)
84 to 86
Impairment of investments in subsidiaries
33
118
31. Employee costs
The Company has no employees other than the Board of Directors. Full details of Directors’ remuneration are set out in the Directors’ 
remuneration report.
Notes to the Company financial statements
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
117
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

32. Dividends
See Note 10 to the Group financial statements.
33. Investments in subsidiaries
Key source of estimation uncertainty 
The carrying value of the investment in subsidiary undertakings is reviewed for impairment on an annual basis. The recoverable amount 
is determined based on value in use. The value in use method requires the Group to determine appropriate assumptions (which are key 
sources of estimation uncertainty) in relation to the growth rates of sales and gross margins, operating costs, future capital maintenance 
expenditure, long-term growth rates and the pre-tax discount rate used to discount the assumed cash flows to present value. Estimation 
uncertainty arises due to changing economic and market factors.
 
£000
At 30 April 2023
38,377
Additions
(29)
Impairment charge
(1,430)
At 5 May 2024
36,918
Investments in subsidiaries represent the Company’s investment in its subsidiary, The Works Investments Limited.
Impairment of investments in subsidiaries
The Company evaluates its investments in subsidiaries annually for any indicators of impairment. The Company considers the relationship 
between its market capitalisation and the carrying value of its investments, among other factors, when reviewing for indicators of impairment. 
As described above, key assumptions for the value in use calculation include those regarding the pre-tax discount rate, long-term growth 
rates, and expected trading performance (sales, gross margin and operating costs). 
The recoverable amount of the investment in The Works Investments Limited has been re-evaluated based on the Group’s latest forecast 
post-tax cash flows included in its Base Case plan (see Note 1(b)(i)) which have regard to historical performance and knowledge of the 
current market, together with the Group’s views on the future achievable growth and the impact of committed cash flows. The cash flows 
include estimates of ongoing capital expenditure required to maintain the store network but exclude any significant growth capital 
initiatives. The immediately quantifiable costs of short-term climate change risks and our net zero commitments have been included 
in the cash flows. Increased capital expenditure has been included in the medium-term cash flows to reflect anticipated technological 
investment that is likely to be required either due to climate risk or in meeting our net zero commitments. 
Management estimates pre-tax discount rates that reflect the current market assessment of the time value of money and the risks 
specific to the Group. The pre-tax discount rate is derived from the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, which has been estimated 
using the capital asset pricing model, the inputs of which include a Company risk-free rate, equity risk premium, Group size premium, 
forecasting risk premium and risk adjustment (beta). The FY24 pre-tax discount rate has been calculated on a pre-IFRS 16 basis; therefore, 
the cash flows used in the value in use calculation include IFRS 16 lease payments. 
FY24
FY23
Pre-tax discount rate
13.5%
17.19%
Long-term growth rate
2.0%
1.0%
As a result of this analysis, an impairment charge of £1.4m has been recognised during FY24. 
34. Trade and other receivables
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Prepayments and accrued income
23
7
Trade and other receivables
23
7
Notes to the Company financial statements continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
118

35. Trade and other payables
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Non-trade payables and accrued expenses
208 
208 
Accruals
46 
86 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings
4,452 
8,692 
Trade and other payables
4,706 
8,986 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings are non-interest bearing and repayable on demand. The decrease in the balance relates to the 
waiver of an intercompany loan with The Works Stores Limited.
36. Share capital and share premium
Accounting policy
The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:
•	 Share premium account: Proceeds received in excess of the nominal value of shares issued, net of any transaction costs.
•	 Share-based payment reserve: Represents the cumulative charges to income under IFRS 2 share-based payments on all share 
options and schemes granted, net of share option exercises.
•	 Retained earnings: All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised elsewhere.
 
FY24
Number
000
FY23
Number
000
Share capital
 
 
Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 1p: 
 
 
At the start of the period
62,500
62,500
Issued in the period
—
—
At the end of the period
62,500
62,500
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Share capital
 
 
At 1 May 2022, 30 April 2023 and 5 May 2024 
625
625
Share premium
 
 
At 1 May 2022, 30 April 2023 and 5 May 2024 
28,322
28,322
During the year, the Employee Benefit Trust purchased £260k (FY23: £473k) of the Company’s shares for the purpose of satisfying future 
employee share-based payment awards.
Investment in own shares
At 5 May 2024, the Employee Benefit Trust held 1,102,801 (FY23: 1,240,577) of the Company’s shares.
The Trust has waived any entitlement to the receipt of dividends in respect of its holding of the Company’s ordinary shares. The market 
value of these shares at 5 May 2024 was £269,083 (FY23: £390,161). In the current period, 700,959 (FY23: 1,408,086) were repurchased 
and transferred into the Trust, with 838,735 (FY23: 167,491) reissued on the exercise of share options.
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
119
Financial statements
Corporate governance
Strategic report

37. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements
Accounting policy
The Group operates equity-settled share-based compensation plans, granting awards that contain both service and performance 
conditions (both market & non-market based).
Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The cost of the awards to employees is 
expensed to the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity, on a straight-line basis over the vesting 
period of the award. The total income statement charge is based on the Company’s estimate of the number of share awards that 
will eventually vest in accordance with the vesting conditions. Any revision to estimates is recognised in the income statement, with 
a corresponding adjustment to equity.
During FY24, the Group had three (FY23: three) share-based payment schemes, which are described below.
TheWorks.co.uk Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
Further details of the Group’s LTIP arrangements are included in the Directors’ remuneration report. The LTIP rules provide for the grant 
of performance related and restricted awards. 
The LTIP awards are subject to a three-year vesting period and will usually only vest following the satisfaction of performance conditions. 
Vested shares will not be released until the end of an additional holding period of two years beginning on the vesting date. Performance 
measures under the LTIP are based on financial measures. For FY24, the vesting conditions require three years’ service from the grant 
date, the achievement of an EBITDA target and a share price target (FY23 awards: three years’ service from the grant date and the 
achievement of an EBITDA target, and a share price target).
Restricted stock awards (RSA)
Restricted stock awards have previously been granted to certain employees, with a three-year vesting period. Restricted share awards 
are not subject to performance conditions.
Save As You Earn Scheme (SAYE)
A Save As You Earn Scheme is established which is a UK tax-qualified scheme under which eligible employees (including Directors) may 
save up to a maximum monthly limit of £250 (as determined by the Remuneration Committee) over a period of three years. Participants 
are granted an option to acquire shares at up to a 20% discount to the price as at the date of grant. The number of shares under option 
is that which can be acquired at that price using savings made.
For more information, refer to Note 26.
Expense recognised in the Company income statement
 
FY24
£000
FY23
£000
Share-based payment expenses
 
 
(Income)/expense recognised in the Company income statement
(140) 
143
(Income)/expense recognised in the subsidiary income statement
(57) 
385
Total IFRS 2 charges recognised in the Group income statement
(197) 
528
Notes to the Company financial statements continued
TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2024
120

Corporate Brokers
Singer Capital Markets Advisory LLP 
One Bartholomew Lane
London
EC2N 2AX
Legal Advisers 
Squire Patton Boggs (UK) LLP 
6 Wellington Place
Leeds 
LS1 4AP
Tel: 0113 284 7000
Auditor
Kreston Reeves LLP
2nd Floor
168 Shoreditch High Street
London
E1 6RA
Tel: 020 73821820
Principal Bankers
HSBC Bank Plc
Birmingham Corporate Centre
6th Floor, 120 Edmund Street
Birmingham
B3 2QZ
Tel: 03455 852 569
Registrars
Equiniti Limited
Aspect House, Spencer Road 
Lancing
West Sussex
BN99 6DA
Financial Public Relations and Investor Relations
Sanctuary Counsel 
5-8 The Sanctuary
Westminster
London
SW1P 3JS
Tel: 0207 340 0395
Registered Office
Boldmere House, Faraday Avenue
Hams Hall Distribution Park 
Coleshill
Birmingham
B46 1AL
Tel: 0121 313 6050
Advisers and contacts
TheWorks.co.uk plc’s commitment to environmental issues 
is reflected in this Annual Report, which has been printed on 
Symbol Satin, an FSC® certified material.
This document was printed by L&S using its environmental print 
technology, which minimises the impact of printing on the environment, 
with 99% of dry waste diverted from landfill. The printer is a CarbonNeutral® 
company. Both the printer and the paper mill are registered to ISO 14001.

Boldmere House
Faraday Avenue
Hams Hall Distribution Park
Coleshill
Birmingham B46 1AL